Page 1 Mail: Sales.IA.RU@deltaww.com TEL: +7 495 644 3240 Delta Electronics ( Americas ) Ltd. USA: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. ( Turkey ) 5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Turkey: TEL: +1-919-767-3813 / FAX: +1-919-767-3969 Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A 34775 Ümraniye –...
Page 2 Limitation of Liability The contents of this user manual are only for the use of the AC motor drives manufactured by Delta. Except as defined in special mandatory laws, Delta provides this user manual “as is” and does not offer any kind of warranty through this user manual for using the product, either express or implied, including but not limited to the following: (i) this product will meet your needs or expectations;...
Page 3 PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY. Disconnect AC input power before connecting any wiring to the AC motor drive.  Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link  capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Do not touch the internal circuits and components.
Page 4 Protective Earthing conductor to be installed have to comply with the national, local laws and regulations or follow IEC61800-5-1 to do grounding. MH300 series is designed for the application of general industrial environment.  Non-linear load causes harmonic current, if the drive uses with public low voltage (e.g.
Page 5 Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ....................1-1 1-1 Nameplate Information…....................1-2 1-2 Model Name........................1-3 1-3 Serial Number.......................1-3 1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device................1-4 1-5 RFI Jumper........................1-5 CHAPTER 2 DIMENSIONS .. …………………………………………………………………………2-1 2-1 Frame A………………………………………………………………………………………2-2 2-2 Frame B………………………………………………………………………………………2-3 2-3 Frame C………………………………………………………………………………………2-4 2-4 Frame D………………………………………………………………………………………2-5 2-5 Frame E………………………………………………………………………………………2-6 2-6 Frame F………………………………………………………………………………………2-7...
Page 6 .........8-39 -- Communication Extension Card, PROFIBUS 8-14 CMM-EC02 ..........8-41 -- Communication Extension Card, EtherCAT 8-15 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables……………………….……………………....8-44 CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ....................9-1 9-1 115V Models…………………………….................9-2 9-2 230V Models……………………………..............9-3 9-3 460V Models……………………………..............9-6 9-4 General Specifications……………………………………………………………………..9-8 9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation……………………....9-9 9-6 Derating Curve……………………………………………………….......9-10...
Page 7 CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETERS SETTINGS ............ 11-1 CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETER SETTINGS ........12.1-00-1 12-1 Descriptions of Parameter Settings………………………………………………12.1-00-1 00 Drive Parameters………………………………………………………………12.1-00-2 01 Basic Parameters………………………………………………………………12.1-01-1 02 Digital Input / Output Parameters……………………………………………12.1-02-1 03 Analog Input / Output Parameters……………………………………………12.1-03-1 04 Multi-Stage Speed Parameters………………………………………………12.1-04-1 05 Motor Parameters………………………………………………………………12.1-05-1 06 Protection Parameters (1) ……………………………………………………12.1-06-1 07 Special Parameters……………………………………………………………12.1-07-1...
Page 8 16-10 ..............16-119 CANopen Master Control Applications 16-11 ..........16-130 Modbus Remote IO Control Applications (Use MODRW) CHAPTER 17 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION………………………..…………………….17-1 17-1 Basic Function Description…………................17-2 17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description............17-3 17-3 Wiring Diagram......................17-4 17-4 Failure Rate of the Drive Safety Function..............17-5 17-5 Reset the Parameter Settings…................17-5 17-6 Timing Diagram Description..................17-6 17-7 Fault Codes and Troubleshooting Instructions……...…………………………………17-9...
Page 9 [This page intentionally left blank] VIII...
Page 10 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 Chapter 1 Introduction Nameplate Information Model Name Serial Number Apply After Service by Mobile Device RFI Jumper...
Page 11 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 After receiving the AC motor drive, check for the following. Inspect the unit after unpacking to ensure that it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that the part number printed on the package matches the part number indicated on the nameplate. Make sure that the mains voltage is within the range indicated on the nameplate.
Page 12 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 Model Name Serial Number...
Page 13 2. Use a Smartphone to run a QR Code reader APP. 3. Point your camera to the QR Code. Hold your camera steady so that the QR code comes into focus. 4. Access the Delta After Service website. 5. Fill your information into the column marked with an orange star.
Page 14 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 RFI Jumper The drive contains Varistors / MOVs that are connected from phase to phase and from phase to ground to protect the drive against mains surges or voltage spikes. Because the Varistors / MOVs from phase to ground are connected to ground with the RFI jumper, removing the RFI jumper disables the protection.
Page 15 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 Built-in EMC filter models Frame B–F Remove the RFI jumper with a screwdriver (as shown below). Frame G Remove the RFI jumper with a screwdriver (as shown below). ...
Page 16 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 Frame H–I 1. Remove RFI ON (frame H) or the screw of RFI-1 ON (frame I) Screw Torque: 6–8 kg-cm / (5.2–6.9 lb-in.) / (0.59–0.78 Nm) 2. Remove the RFI jumper RFI-2 (frame I).
Page 17 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 Isolating main power from ground: When the power distribution system of the drive is a floating ground system (IT Systems) or an asymmetric ground system (Corner Grounded TN Systems), you must remove the RFI jumper. Removing the RFI jumper disconnects the internal capacitors from ground to avoid damaging the internal circuits and to reduce the ground leakage current.
Page 18 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300  Do not install an external EMC filter. The EMC filter is connected to ground through the filter capacitors, thus connecting the power input to ground. This is very dangerous and can easily damage the drive. Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems) Caution: Do not remove the RFI jumper while there is power to the input terminal of the drive.
Page 19 Chapter 1 IntroductionMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 1-10...
Page 20 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 Chapter 2 Dimensions Frame A Frame B Frame C Frame D Frame E Frame F Frame G Frame H Frame I 2-10 Digital Keypad...
Page 21 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-1 Frame A A1: VFD1A6MH11ANSAA; VFD1A6MH11ENSAA; VFD1A6MH21ANSAA; VFD1A6MH21ENSAA A2: VFD2A5MH11ANSAA; VFD2A5MH11ENSAA; VFD2A8MH21ANSAA; VFD2A8MH21ENSAA; VFD1A6MH23ANSAA; VFD1A6MH23ENSAA; VFD2A8MH23ANSAA; VFD2A8MH23ENSAA; VFD1A5MH43ANSAA; VFD1A5MH43ENSAA A3: VFD5A0MH23ANSAA; VFD5A0MH23ENSAA; VFD3A0MH43ANSAA; VFD3A0MH43ENSAA A4: VFD5A0MH23ANSNA; VFD5A0MH23ENSNA; VFD3A0MH43ANSNA; VFD3A0MH43ENSNA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 68.0 (2.68) 128.0 (5.04) 130.0 (5.12) 56.0 (2.20) 118.0 (4.65)
Page 22 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-2 Frame B B1: VFD7A5MH23ANSAA; VFD7A5MH23ENSAA; VFD4A2MH43ANSAA; VFD4A2MH43ENSAA B2: VFD5A0MH21ANSAA; VFD5A0MH21ENSAA B3: VFD1A6MH21AFSAA; VFD2A8MH21AFSAA; VFD5A0MH21AFSAA; VFD1A5MH43AFSAA; VFD3A0MH43AFSAA; VFD4A2MH43AFSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 72.0 (2.83) 142.0 (5.59) 158.0 (6.22) 60.0 (2.36) 130.0 (5.12) 6.4 (0.25) 5.2 (0.20) 72.0 (2.83) 142.0 (5.59) 162.0 (6.38) 60.0 (2.36)
Page 23 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-3 Frame C C1: VFD5A0MH11ANSAA; VFD5A0MH11ENSAA; VFD7A5MH21ANSAA; VFD7A5MH21ENSAA; VFD11AMH21ANSAA; VFD11AMH21ENSAA; VFD11AMH23ANSAA; VFD11AMH23ENSAA; VFD17AMH23ANSAA; VFD17AMH23ENSAA; VFD5A7MH43ANSAA; VFD5A7MH43ENSAA; VFD9A0MH43ANSAA; VFD9A0MH43ENSAA C2: VFD7A5MH21AFSAA; VFD11AMH21AFSAA; VFD5A7MH43AFSAA; VFD9A0MH43AFSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 87.0 (3.43) 157.0 (6.18) 167.0 (6.57) 73.0 (2.87) 144.5 (5.69) 5.0 (0.20) 5.5 (0.22) 87.0 (3.43)
Page 24 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-4 Frame D D1: VFD25AMH23ANSAA; VFD25AMH23ENSAA; VFD13AMH43ANSAA; VFD13AMH43ENSAA; VFD17AMH43ANSAA; VFD17AMH43ENSAA D2: VFD13AMH43AFSAA; VFD17AMH43AFSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 109.0 (4.29) 207.0 (8.15) 169.0 (6.65) 94.0 (3.70) 193.8 (7.63) 6.0 (0.24) 5.5 (0.22) 109.0 (4.29) 207.0 (8.15) 202.0 (7.95) 94.0 (3.70) 193.8 (7.63) 6.0 (0.24)
Page 25 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-5 Frame E E1: VFD33AMH23ANSAA; VFD33AMH23ENSAA; VFD49AMH23ANSAA; VFD49AMH23ENSAA; VFD25AMH43ANSAA; VFD25AMH43ENSAA; VFD32AMH43ANSAA; VFD32AMH43ENSAA E2: VFD25AMH43AFSAA; VFD32AMH43AFSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 130.0 (5.12) 250.0 (9.84) 200.0 (7.87) 115.0 (4.53) 236.8 (9.32) 6.0 (0.24) 5.5 (0.22) 130.0 (5.12) 250.0 (9.84) 234.0 (9.21) 115.0 (4.53) 236.8 (9.32)
Page 26 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-6 Frame F F1: VFD65AMH23ANSAA; VFD65AMH23ENSAA; VFD38AMH43ANSAA; VFD38AMH43ENSAA; VFD45AMH43ANSAA; VFD45AMH43ENSAA F2: VFD38AMH43AFSAA; VFD45AMH43AFSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 175.0 (6.89) 300.0 (11.81) 207.0 (8.15) 154.0 (6.06) 279.5 (11.00) 6.5 (0.26) 8.4 (0.33) 175.0 (6.89) 300.0 (11.81) 259.0 (10.20) 154.0 (6.06) 279.5 (11.00) 6.5 (0.26) 8.4 (0.33)
Page 27 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-7 Frame G G: VFD60AMH43AFSAA; VFD60AMH43ANSAA; VFD75AMH23ANSAA; VFD90AMH23ANSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 250.0 (9.84) 400.0 (15.75) 225.0 (8.86) 231.0 (9.09) 381.0 (15.00) 10.0 (0.39) 8.5 (0.33)
Page 28 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-8 Frame H H: VFD75AMH43AFSAA; VFD75AMH43ANSAA; VFD91AMH43AFSAA; VFD91AMH43ANSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 280.0 (11.02) 500.0 (19.69) 280.0 (11.02) 235.0 (9.25) 475.0 (18.70) 11.0 (0.43) SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL A DETAIL B (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE)
Page 29 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-9 Frame I I: VFD112MH43AFSAA; VFD112MH43ANSAA; VFD120MH23ANSAA; VFD146MH23ANSAA; VFD150MH43AFSAA; VFD150MH43ANSAA Unit: mm (inch) Frame 330.0 (12.99) 550.0 (21.65) 300.0 (11.81) 285.0 (11.22) 525.0 (20.67) 11.0 (0.43) SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL B DETAIL A (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) 2-10...
Page 30 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 2-10 Digital Keypad KPMH-LC01 Unit: mm (inch) 68.0 (2.67) 63.8 (2.51) 45.2 (1.78) 8.0 (0.31) 46.8 (1.84) 42.0 (1.65) 26.0 (1.02) 7.5 (0.30) 36.1 (1.41) 22.7 (0.89) 7.9 (0.30) 2.2 (0.09) 1.3 (0.05) M3*0.5(2X) LABEL 2-11...
Page 31 Chapter 2 DimensionsMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 2-12...
Page 32 Chapter 3 InstallationMH300 Chapter 3 Installation Mounting Clearance Airflow and Power Dissipation...
Page 33 Chapter 3 InstallationMH300 3-1 Mounting Clearance Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood (sawdust), metal particles, etc. from adhering  to the heat sink. Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one, use a ...
Page 34 Chapter 3 InstallationMH300 3-2 Airflow and Power Dissipation Airflow rate for cooling Power Dissipation Frame Flow Rate Flow Rate Loss External Internal Total Model No. (Unit: cfm) (Unit: m / hr) (Heat sink, unit: W) (Unit: W) (Unit: W) VFD1A6MH11ANSAA 10.0 18.0 VFD1A6MH11ENSAA...
Page 35 Chapter 3 InstallationMH300 Airflow rate for cooling Power Dissipation Frame Flow Rate Flow Rate Loss External Internal Total Model No. (Unit: cfm) (Unit: m / hr) (Heat sink, unit: W) (Unit: W) (Unit: W) VFD5A7MH43ANSAA VFD5A7MH43ENSAA 60.6 22.8 83.4 VFD5A7MH43AFSAA 16.0 27.2 VFD9A0MH43ANSAA...
Page 36 Chapter 4 WiringMH300 Chapter 4 Wiring 4-1 System Wiring Diagram 4-2 Wiring...
Page 37 Chapter 4 WiringMH300 After removing the front cover, verify that the power and control terminals are clearly visible. Read the following precautions to avoid wiring mistakes.  It is crucial to cut off the AC motor drive power before doing any wiring. A charge with hazardous voltages may still remain in the DC bus capacitors even after the power has been turned off for a short time.
Page 38 Chapter 4 WiringMH300 4-1 System Wiring Diagram Power input Please refer to Chapter 9 Specification Table terminal in the user manual for detail. There may be a large inrush current during power on. Refer to Section 7-2 NFB to select NFB or fuse a suitable NFB or Section 7-3 Fuse Specification Chart.
Page 39 Chapter 4 WiringMH300 4-2 Wiring *1 Refer to Section 7-4 AC / DC Reactor for more details about the specifications of DC reactor. *2 Refer to Section 7-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives for more details about the specifications of brake resistor.
Page 40 Chapter 4 WiringMH300 *1 & *2 Refer to Section 7-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives for more details about the specifications of brake module and brake resistor. *3 Refer to Section 7-4 AC / DC Reactor for more details about the specifications of DC reactor.
Page 41 Chapter 4 WiringMH300 SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) Mode...
Page 42 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals 5-1 Main Circuit Diagram 5-2 Main Circuit Terminals...
Page 43  W/T3 of the AC motor drive. DO NOT use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta. DO NOT connect brake resistors directly to +1/DC+ to DC-, +2/B1 to DC- to prevent  damage to the drive.
Page 44 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 counterclockwise (as viewed from the shaft end of the motor, refer to the pointed direction in the figure below) when it receives a forward operation command. To permanently reverse the direction of rotation, exchange any two motor leads. Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake and DC circuit resistor...
Page 45 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 5-1 Main Circuit Diagram Terminals Descriptions R/L1, S/L2 Mains input terminals one-phase R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Mains input terminals three-phase U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Motor output terminals for connecting three-phase IM and PM motors Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor and harmonics. +1, +2 Remove the jumper when using a DC reactor.
Page 46 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 5-2 Main Circuit Terminals Use the specified ring lug for main circuit terminal wiring. See Fig.1 and Fig.2 for ring lug specifications.  For other types of wiring use the wires that comply with the local regulation. After crimping the wire to the ring lug (must be UL approved), UL and CSA approved R/C (YDPU2/8), ...
Page 47 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame AWG Kit P/N (MAX) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MIN) (MIN) (MAX) (MAX) RNB22-8 RNBS38-8 SQNBS60-8 40.0 11.0 10.0 23.0 13.0 14.0 24.0 SQNBS60-8 SQNBS80-8 SQNBS80-8 RNB60-8 RNB70-8 RNB80-8 SQNBS100-8 50.0 16.0 10.0 27.0 13.0 14.0 28.0 SQNBS150-8...
Page 48 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame A If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and  temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 50°C environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature ...
Page 49 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame B If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and  temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 50°C environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature ...
Page 50 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame C If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and  temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 50°C environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature ...
Page 51 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame D If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and  temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 50°C environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature ...
Page 52 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame E If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and  temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 50°C environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature ...
Page 53 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame F IP20 If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and  temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 50°C environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature ...
Page 54 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame G If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and  temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 50°C environment, select copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature ...
Page 55 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame H R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 POWER MOTOR Datamatrix If you install at Ta 40°C (with conduit box) / 50°C (without conduit box) above environment, select  copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 40°C (with conduit box) / 50°C (without conduit box) environment, select copper ...
Page 56 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Frame I R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 POWER MOTOR Datamatrix If you install at Ta 40°C (with conduit box) / 50°C (without conduit box) above environment, select  copper wire with voltage rating of 600 V and temperature resistance of 90°C or above. If you install at Ta 40°C (with conduit box) / 50°C (without conduit box) environment, select copper ...
Page 57 Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMH300 Install the drive without conduit box Main Circuit Terminals Terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, DC-, DC+/+1 Models Screw & Screw & Max. Wire Min. Wire Max. Wire Min. Wire Torque Torque Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge (±10%)
Page 58 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300 Chapter 6 Control Terminals 6-1 Control Terminals Specifications...
Page 59 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300 Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, ACM)  Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible (less than 20 m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to the ACM terminal can reduce interference.
Page 60 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300  When the photo coupler is using the internal power supply, the switch connection for Sink and Source modes are as shown in the picture above: MI-DCM: Sink mode, MI- +24 V: Source mode. Transistor output terminals (MO1, MO2, MCM) ...
Page 61 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300 6-1 Control Terminal Specifications Control Terminal Location Map Fig. 6-7 Control Terminal Distribution Diagram Fig. 6-6 Wiring precautions: The default condition is +24V / S1 / S2 shorted by jumper, as shown 1. in the Fig. 6-6. Refer to ...
Page 62 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300 Fig. 6-8 Recommended model and size of crimp terminals Unit: mm Vendor Vendor P/N A(MAX) B(MAX) D(MAX) W(MAX) 0.2 mm AI 0,25- 8 YE 12.5 (24AWG) 0.34 mm PHOENIX CONTACT AI 0,34- 8 TQ 12.5 (22AWG) 0.5 mm AI 0,5 - 8 WH (20AWG)
Page 63 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300 Terminals Terminal Function Description Digital frequency meter DFM is a pulse-signal output; Duty-cycle: 50% Minimum load impedance R : 1 kΩ / 100 pf Maximum current: 30 mA Maximum voltage: 30 V ± 1% (when 30 V / 30 mA / R = 100 pf) Maximum output frequency: 33 kHz...
Page 64 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300 Terminals Terminal Function Description Analog current frequency Impedance: 250 Ω command Range: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA / 0–10 V = 0–maximum output frequency (Pr.01-00) Mode switching by setting Pr.03-01, Pr.03-29 ACI resolution = 12 bits Switch: The AFM default is 0–10 V (voltage mode).
Page 65 Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMH300 [This page intentionally left blank]...
Page 66 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Chapter 7 Optional Accessories All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives Magnetic Contactor / Air Circuit Breaker and Non-Fuse Circuit Breaker Fuse Specification Chart AC / DC Reactors Zero-phase Reactors EMC Filter EMC Shield Plate Capacitive Filter The Assembly of NEMA KIT...
Page 67 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional accessories to your drive substantially improves the drive’s performance. Select accessories according to your need or contact your local distributor for suggestions. 7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives 115V, single-phase Applicable Max.
Page 68 NOTE: 1. Select the resistance value, power and brake usage (ED %) according to Delta rules. Definition for Brake Usage ED% ED% = T1 / T0 x 100 (%)
Page 69 2. Any damage to the drive or other equipment caused by using brake resistors and brake modules that are not provided by Delta voids the warranty. 3. Consider environmental safety factors when installing the brake resistors. If you use the minimum resistance value, consult local dealers for the power calculation.
Page 70 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 For example, a 460V, 15 kW MH300 has a braking current of 24 A (refer to the tables in this section), so it can use the thermal overload relay with a rated current of 10 A (10 x 260% = 26A > 24A). The specification of each thermal relay may vary among different manufacturers, carefully read the specification before using it.
Page 71 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-2 Magnetic Contactor / Air Circuit Breaker and Non-Fuse Circuit Breaker Magnetic Contactor (MC) and Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) It is recommended the surrounding temperature for MC should be ≥ 60°C and that for ACB should be ≥...
Page 72 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 460V models Heavy Duty Heavy Duty MC／ACB Selection Frame Model Output Current (A) Input Current (A) VFD1A5MH43ANSAA VFD3A0MH43ANSAA VFD4A2MH43ANSAA VFD4A2MH43AFSAA VFD1A5MH43AFSAA VFD3A0MH43AFSAA VFD5A7MH43ANSAA VFD5A7MH43AFSAA VFD7A3MH43ANSAA VFD7A3MH43AFSAA VFD9A0MH43ANSAA VFD9A0MH43AFSAA VFD13AMH43ANSAA 14.3 VFD13AMH43AFSAA VFD17AMH43ANSAA 17.5 19.3 VFD17AMH43AFSAA VFD25AMH43ANSAA 27.5 VFD25AMH43AFSAA VFD32AMH43ANSAA...
Page 73 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker Comply with the UL standard: Per UL 508  The rated current of the breaker shall be 1.6–2.6 times of the maximum rated input current of the AC  motor drive. Refer to the suggested current value as shown below. To compare the time-current characteristic of non-fuse circuit breaker and AC motor drive’s ...
Page 74 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 230V, three-phase 460V, three-phase The Suggested Rated The Suggested Rated Model Input Current of Non- Model Input Current of Non-fuse fuse Circuit Breaker (A) Circuit Breaker (A) VFD32AMH43ANSXX VFD49AMH23ANSXX VFD32AMH43ENSXX VFD49AMH23ENSXX VFD32AMH43AFSXX VFD38AMH43ANSXX VFD65AMH23ANSXX VFD38AMH43ENSXX VFD65AMH23ENSXX VFD38AMH43AFSXX VFD45AMH43ANSXX VFD75AMH23ANSAA...
Page 75 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-3 Fuse Specification Chart Fuse specifications lower than the table shown below are allowed.  For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with  the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local codes. Use UL classified fuses to fulfill this requirement.
Page 76 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Input Current (A) Specification of Fuse (600 V Model Normal Duty Heavy Duty I (A) Normal Duty VFD11AMH23ANSXX 15.0 13.2 Class T JJS-50 VFD11AMH23ENSXX VFD17AMH23ANSXX 23.4 20.4 Class T JJS-80 VFD17AMH23ENSXX VFD25AMH23ANSXX 32.4 30.0 59.4 Class T JJS-60 VFD25AMH23ENSXX VFD33AMH23ANSXX 43.2...
Page 77 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Input Current (A) Specification of Fuse (600 V Model Normal Duty Heavy Duty I (A) Normal Duty VFD112MH43ANSAA Class T JJS-250 VFD112MH43AFSAA VFD150MH43ANSAA Class T JJS-300 VFD150MH43AFSAA Table 7-15 7-12...
Page 78 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-4 AC / DC Reactors AC Input Reactor Installing an AC reactor on the input side of an AC motor drive can increase line impedance, improve the power factor, reduce input current, and reduce interference generated from the motor drive. It also reduces momentary voltage surges or abnormal current spikes.
Page 79 115V, 50–60 Hz / Single-phase - Normal duty Rated Saturation Input / DC Output AC Input / DC Reactor AC Output Reactor Model Current Current Reactor Reactor Delta Part # Weight (kg) Delta Part # Weight (kg) (Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH) VFD1A6MH11ANSAA 3.66 DR008D0366 2.54 DR005L0254 VFD1A6MH11ENSAA VFD2A5MH11ANSAA 4.05...
Page 80 230V, 50–60 Hz / Single-phase - Normal duty Rated Saturation Input / DC Output AC Input / DC Reactor AC Output Reactor Model Current Current Reactor Reactor Delta Part # Weight (kg) Delta Part # Weight (kg) (Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH) VFD1A6MH21ANSAA VFD1A6MH21ENSAA 5.857 DR005D0585 2.54 DR005L0254...
Page 81 AC Input Reactor AC Output Reactor Rated Saturation Output DC Reactor Model Current Current Weight Weight Reactor Reactor Delta Part # Delta Part # Delta Part # (Arms) (Arms) (kg) (kg) (mH) (mH) VFD75AMH23ANSAA 121.5 0.141 DR090AP141 11.5 DR090LP141 0.325 DR090DP325...
Page 82 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Input / AC Input Reactor AC Output Reactor Rated Saturation Output DC Reactor Current Current Reactor Model Reactor Delta Part # Weight Weight (Arms) (Arms) (mH) Delta Part # Delta Part # (mH) (kg) (kg) VFD5A7MH43ANSAA VFD5A7MH43ENSAA 9.75...
Page 83 VFD150MH43ANSAA 0.135 DR180AP135 DR180LP135 VFD150MH43AFSAA Table 7-23 The table below shows the THDi specification when using Delta's drives to work with AC / DC reactors. Drive Spec. Models without Built-in DC Reactors Models with Built-in DC Reactors Reactor No AC / DC...
Page 84 [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [9.7–11.5 lb-in] / [0.6–0.8 Nm] [1.1–1.3 Nm] Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Fig. 7-7 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 PE D AC Input Reactor DR005A0254 DR008A0159 DR011A0115 6*12 80.5 DR017AP746 6*12 80.5...
Page 85 PE bolt Torque: 11.2–13.3 kg-cm / [9.7–11.5 lb-in] / [1.1–1.3 Nm] Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Fig. 7-8 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 PE D AC Input Reactor DR025AP507 6*12 80.5 DR033AP320 6*12 80.5...
Page 86 Torque: 15.3–45.9 kg-cm / [13.3–39.8 lb-in] / [1.5–4.5 Nm] Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Fig. 7-9 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - Dimensions AC Input Reactor DR065AP162 As shown in the figure above Table 7-27 7-21...
Page 87 [7.1–8.9 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm] PE Screw M8 x 23 Torque: 58.2–64.3 kg-cm / [50.5–55.8 lb-in.] / [5.7–6.3 Nm] Fig. 7-10 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - Dimensions AC Input Reactor DR075AP170 As shown in the figure above Table 7-28 7-22...
Page 88 [0.8–1.0 Nm] PE 螺絲 PE Screw M8 x 23 Torque: 58.2–64.3 kg-cm / [50.5–55.8 lb-in.] / [5.7–6.3 Nm] Fig. 7-11 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - Dimensions AC Input Reactor DR090AP141 As shown in the figure above Table 7-29 7-23...
Page 89 [7.1–8.9 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm] PE Screw M8 x 23 Torque: 58.2–64.3 kg-cm / [50.5–55.8 lb-in.] / [5.7–6.3 Nm] Fig. 7-12 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - Dimensions AC Input Reactor DR105AP106 As shown in the figure above Table 7-30 7-24...
Page 90 [5.3–7.1 lb-in.] / [0.6–0.8 Nm] PE Screw M8 x 23 Torque: 58.2–64.3 kg-cm / [50.5–55.8 lb-in.] / [5.7–6.3 Nm] Fig. 7-13 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - Dimensions AC Input Reactor DR146AP087 As shown in the figure above Table 7-31 7-25...
Page 91 [5.3–7.1 lb-in.] / [0.6–0.8 Nm] PE Screw M8 x 23 Torque: 58.2–64.3 kg-cm / [50.5–55.8 lb-in.] / [5.7–6.3 Nm] Fig. 7-14 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - Dimensions AC Input Reactor DR180AP070 As shown in the figure above Table 7-32 7-26...
Page 92 [9.7–11.5 lb-in.] / [0.6–0.8 Nm] [1 1 1 3 N ] Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Fig. 7-15 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 PE D AC Input Reactor DR003A0810 DR004A0607 DR006A0405 6*12 80.5 DR009A0270...
Page 93 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Installing Screw M5 Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Fig. 7-16 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 PE D AC Input Reactor 11.2–13.3 kg-cm / DR024AP881 6*12 [9.7–11.5 lb-in.] / [1.1–1.3 Nm]...
Page 94 Torque: 15.3–45.9 kg-cm / [13.3–39.8 lb-in.] / [1.5–4.5 Nm] Screw length must not interfere with the mounting holes Fig. 7-17 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - Dimensions AC Input Reactor DR060AP405 As shown in the figure above Table 7-35 7-29...
Page 95 Terminals 4 mm Torque: 8.2–10.2 kg-cm / [7.1–8.9 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm] Torque: 58.2–64.3 kg-cm / [50.5–55.8 lb-in.] / [5.7–6.3 Nm] Fig. 7-18 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 AC Input Reactor DR073AP334 7*13 DR091AP267 7*13 DR110AP221 7*13 Table 7-36...
Page 96 Torque: 8.2–10.2 kg-cm / [7.1–8.9 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm] PE Screw M8 x 23 Torque: 58.2–64.3 kg-cm / [50.5–55.8 lb-in.] / [5.7–6.3 Nm] Fig. 7-19 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 AC Input Reactor 20*3 DR150AP162 11*18 20*3 DR180AP135 11*18...
Page 97 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 AC Output Reactor Torque: 10.2–12.2 kg-cm / [8.9–10.6 lb-in] / Torque: 6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [1.0–1.2 Nm] [0.6–0.8 Nm] Fig. 7-20 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 PE D AC Output Reactor DR005L0254 DR008L0159 6*12 80.5...
Page 98 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Terminal 16 mm Torque: 12.2–14.3 kg-cm / [10.6–12.4 lb-in] / [1.2–1.4 Nm] Fig. 7-21 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 PE D AC Output Reactor DR049LP215 6*12 1.2–1.4 DR065LP162 6*12 2.5–3.0 Table 7-39 7-33...
Page 99 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Fig. 7-22 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 AC Output Reactor DR075LP170 7*13 20*3 DR090LP141 7*13 20*3 DR105LP106 7*13 20*3 DR146LP087 7*13 30*3 DR180LP070 11*18 30*5 Table 7-40 7-34...
Page 100 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Torque: 10.2–12.2 kg-cm / [8.9–10.6 lb-in] / Torque: 6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [1.0–1.2 Nm] [0.6–0.8 Nm] Fig. 7-23 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 AC Output Reactor DR003L0810 DR004L0607 6*12 80.5 DR006L0405 6*12 80.5...
Page 101 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Terminals 16 mm Torque: 12.2–14.3 kg-cm / [10.6–12.4 lb-in] / [1.2–1.4 Nm] Fig. 7-24 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 AC Output Reactor DR038LP639 6*12 DR045LP541 7*13 Table 7-42 7-36...
Page 102 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Fig. 7-25 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 AC Output Reactor DR060LP405 7*13 20*3 DR073LP334 11*18 20*3 DR091LP267 11*18 20*3 DR110LP221 10*18 20*3 Table 7-43 7-37...
Page 103 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Fig. 7-26 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - D1*D2 AC Output Reactor DR150LP162 10*18 30*3 DR180LP135 11*22 30*3 Table 7-44 7-38...
Page 104 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 DC Reactor Fig. 7-27 Unit: mm Delta’s Part No. - DC Reactor DR005D0585 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5 DR008D0366 64±2 56±2 9.5*5.5 DR011D0266 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5 DR017D0172 64±2 89.5±2 9.5*5.5 DR025D0117 79±2 82.5±2 9.5*5.5 DR033DP851 95±2 87±2 10*6.5 DR049DP574 95±2...
Page 105 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Delta’s Part No. - DC Reactor DR004D1403 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5 DR006D0935 64±2 69.5±2 9.5*5.5 DR009D0623 64±2 89.5±2 9.5*5.5 DR010D0534 79±2 70±2 9.5*5.5 DR012D0467 79±2 82.5±2 9.5*5.5 DR018D0311 95±2 87±2 10*6.5 DR024D0233 95±2 97±2 10*6.5 DR032D0175 95±2 116.5±2...
Page 106 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Rated Current in Without Output AC reactor With Output AC Reactor 115V Single-phase Normal Duty Shielded Cable Non-shielded Shielded Cable Non-shielded Model (Arms) (meter) cable (meter) (meter) cable (meter) VFD1A6MH11ANSAA VFD1A6MH11ENSAA VFD2A5MH11ANSAA VFD2A5MH11ENSAA VFD5A0MH11ANSAA VFD5A0MH11ENSAA Table 7-46 Rated Current in Without Output AC reactor With Output AC Reactor...
Page 107 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Rated Current in Without Output AC reactor With Output AC Reactor 230V Three-phase Normal Duty Shielded Cable Non-shielded Shielded Cable Non-shielded Model (Arms) (meter) cable (meter) (meter) cable (meter) VFD120MH23ANSAA VFD120MH23AFSAA VFD146MH23ANSAA VFD146MH23AFSAA Table 7-48 Rated Current in Without Output AC reactor With Output AC Reactor 460V Three-phase...
Page 108 7-5 Zero-phase Reactors You can also suppress interference by installing a zero-phase reactor at the main input or the motor output of the drive, depending on the location of the interference. Delta provides two types of zero-phase reactors to solve interference problems.
Page 109 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 B. Casing without mechanical fixed part This solution has higher performance: high initial magnetic permeability, high saturation induction density, low iron loss and perfect temperature characteristic. If the zero-phase reactor does not need to be fixed mechanically, use this solution. Fig.
Page 110 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Zero Phase Reactor R/L1 U/T1 Power MOTOR S/L2 V/T2 Supply T/L3 W/T3 Figure B: Multi-turn zero-phase reactor Installation notes Install the zero-phase reactor at the output terminal of the frequency converter (U, V, W). After the zero-phase reactor is installed, it reduces the electromagnetic radiation and load stress emitted by the wiring of the frequency converter.
Page 111 C2-motor cable C2-motor cable Model Model -Zero-phase reactor length-30m length-100m length-100m Frame Current - MH300 -EMC Filter Position to place zero-phase reactor DELTA VFD1A6MH11ANSAA EMF11AM21A RF008X00A or RF008X00N RF008X00A or RF008X00N VFD2A5MH11ANSAA 10.1 EMF11AM21A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ RF008X00A or RF008X00N...
Page 112 -Zero-phase reactor Frame Current - MH300 -EMC Filter length-10 m 30 m length-100m length-100m Position to place zero-phase reactor DELTA RF008X00A or VFD75AMH23ANSAA B84143A0120R105 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ RF004X00N RF008X00A or VFD90AMH23ANSAA B84143A0120R105 ✓ ✓...
Page 113 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Dimension EMF11AM21A, EMF10AM23A, EMF6A0M43A Screw Torque M5 * 2 16–20 kg-cm / (13.9–17.3 lb-in.) / (1.56–1.96 Nm) M4 * 2 14–16 kg-cm / (12.2–13.8 lb-in.) / (1.38–1.56 Nm) Table 7-58 Fig. 7-32 Unit: mm [inch] EMF27AM21B, EMF24AM23B, EMF33AM23B, EMF12AM43B, EMF23AM43B 7-48...
Page 114 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Screw Torque M5 * 4 16–20 kg-cm / (13.9–17.3 lb-in.) / (1.56–1.96 Nm) Table 7-59 Fig. 7-33 Unit: mm [inch] TDK B84143D0050R127 (50A) 7-49...
Page 115 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Fig. 7-34 Unit: mm TDK B84143D0075R127 (75A), TDK B84143D0090R127 (90A) Fig. 7-35 Unit: mm B84143A0120R105 (120A) 7-50...
Page 116 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Torque: 32.7~37.8 kg-cm / [28.4~32.8 lb-in.] / [3.2~3.7 Nm] Fig. 7-36 Unit: mm TDK B84143D0120R127 (120A), B84143D0150R127 (150A) Torque: 153.1~204.1 kg-cm / [132.9~177.2 lb-in.] / [15.0~20.0 Nm] Fig. 7-37 Unit: mm B84143D0200R127 (200A) 7-51...
Page 117 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Torque: 153.1~204.1 kg-cm / [132.9~177.2 lb-in.] / [15.0~20.0 Nm] Fig. 7-38 Unit: mm The table below is the maximum shielded cable length for drive models with built-in EMC filters. You 7-52...
Page 118 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 can choose the corresponding shielded cable length according to the required noise emission and electromagnetic interference class. Comply with EMC Comply with EMC Drives with Built-in EMC Rated Current (IEC 61800-3) Class C3 (IEC 61800-3) Class C2 (HD) Frame Models...
Page 119 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-7 EMC Shield Plate EMC Shield Plate (for using with shielded cable) Model of EMC Shield Plate Reference Figure Frame MKM-EPA Fig. 7-39 MKM-EPB Fig. 7-40 MKM-EPC Fig. 7-41 MKM-EPD Fig. 7-42 MKM-EPE Fig. 7-43 7-54...
Page 120 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Model of EMC Shield Plate Reference Figure Frame MKM-EPF Fig. 7-44 MKM-EPG Fig. 7-45 MKM-EPH Fig. 7-46 MKM-EPI Fig. 7-47 7-55...
Page 121 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Installation (Take Frame A model as an example) 1. As shown on the right figures, fix the iron plate on the AC motor drive. Frame Screw Torque M3.5 6–8 kg-cm / [5.2–6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59–0.78 Nm] 6–8 kg-cm / [5.2–6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59–0.78 Nm] 6–8 kg-cm / [5.2–6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59–0.78 Nm] 4–6 kg-cm / [3.5–5.2 lb-in.] / [0.39–0.59 Nm]...
Page 122 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Recommended wire mounting method Model of EMC Frame Reference Figure Shield Plate MKM-EPA Fig. 7-51 MKM-EPB Fig. 7-52 MKM-EPC Fig. 7-53 MKM-EPD Fig. 7-54 MKM-EPE Fig. 7-55 MKM-EPF Fig. 7-56 7-57...
Page 123 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Model of EMC Frame Reference Figure Shield Plate MKM-EPG Fig. 7-57 MKM-EPH Fig. 7-58 MKM-EPI Fig. 7-59 7-58...
Page 124 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-8 Capacitive Filter Capacitor Filter is a simple filter accessory, installed to provide simple filtering and eliminating interference. Installation diagram Ca pa citor Filte r G rid Motor Fig. 7-60 Capacitive filter and drive wiring figure S/L2 R/L1 T/L3...
Page 125 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Specifications Model Capacitance Temperature range Cx: 1 μF ± 20 % – CXY101-43A +85°C Cy: 0.1 μF ± 20 % Table 7-64 Dimensions Unit: mm [inch] 77 .5 [3 .05 ] 77 .5 [3 .05 ] 86 .5 [3 .41 ] 4.0 [ 0.1 6] 31 .6 [1 .24 ]...
Page 126 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-9 The Assembly of NEMA KIT NEMA KIT is in compliance with protection level NEMA 1 / UL Type 1 Frame A (A1, A2, A3, A4) MKMH-CBA NEMA KIT model: Unit: mm [inch] 116.4 [4.58] 71.5 [2.81] Fig.
Page 127 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame B NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBB Unit: mm [inch] 102.7 [4.04] 72.0 [2.83] Fig. 7-64 7-62...
Page 128 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame C NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBC Unit: mm [inch] 87.0 [3.43] 104.2 [4.10] Fig. 7-65 7-63...
Page 129 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame D NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBD Unit: mm [inch] 103.5 [4.07] 103.7 [4.08] Fig. 7-66 7-64...
Page 130 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame E NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBE Unit: mm [inch] 102.1 [4.02] 124.5 [4.90] Fig. 7-67 7-65...
Page 131 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame F NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBF Unit: mm [inch] 168.7 [6.64] 105.8 [4.17] Fig. 7-68 7-66...
Page 132 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame G NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBG Unit: mm [inch] Fig. 7-69 7-67...
Page 133 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame H NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBH Unit: mm [inch] Fig. 7-70 7-68...
Page 134 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame I NEMA KIT model: MKMH-CBI Unit: mm [inch] Fig. 7-71 7-69...
Page 135 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Installation – – – Recommended screw torque: M3: 4 6 kg-cm / (3.5 5.2 lb-in.) / (0.39 0.59 Nm) – – – M3.5: 4 6 kg-cm / (3.5 5.2 lb-in.) / (0.39 0.59 Nm) – – –...
Page 136 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame B–F Fig. 7-77 Fig. 7-78 Fig. 7-79 Fig. 7-80 Fig. 7-81 7-71...
Page 137 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame G –12 –10 – Recommended screw torque: M5: 10 kg-cm / (8.7 .4 lb-in.) / (0.98 1.18 Nm) Fig. 7-83 Fig. 7-82 Fig. 7-85 Fig. 7-84 7-72...
Page 138 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame H–I Fix the NEMA KIT on the drive Frame H M4*2: 14–16 kg-cm / (12.1–13.9 lb-in.) / (1.38–1.56 Nm) M8*2: 75–85 kg-cm / (65.0–73.7 lb-in.) / (7.35–8.33 Nm) Frame I M4*3: 14–16 kg-cm / (12.1–13.9 lb-in.) / (1.38–1.56 Nm) M8*2: 175–185 kg-cm / (151.9–160.6 lb-in.) / (17.16–18.14 Nm)
Page 139 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-10 The Assembly of Fan Kit Frame Fan Model Fan Kit MKM-FKMA MKM-FKMB MKM-FKMC MKM-FKMD MKM-FKME MKM-FKMF Fig. 7-89 MKM-FKMG Fig. 7-90 MKM-FKMH MKM-FKMI Fig. 7-91 7-74...
Page 140 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Fan Removal Frame A–F As shown in the figure on the right, press the tabs on both sides of the fan to remove it. Fig. 7-92 Disconnect the power cable when removing the fan. Fig. 7-93 7-75...
Page 141 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame G 1. As shown in the figure on the right, pry open the cover by using slotted screwdriver. Fig. 7-94 2. Remove the screws which are at the bottom. Fig. 7-95 3. You have to remove the fan cables before taking out the fans.
Page 142 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame H–I 1. As shown in the figure on the right, remove four screws. Torque: 24–26 kg-cm / (20.8–22.6 lb-in.) / (2.35–2.55 Nm) Fig. 7-97 2. Remove the fan module by rotating it. Fig. 7-98 3. Press the clip of fan connector, and then remove the fan connector.
Page 143 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-11 Keypad Panel Mounting KPMH-LC01 Method 1: Direct installation on a plate Unit: mm [inch] 45.2 [1.78] Deep Torque: 5.0 [0.2] MAX. 8–9 kg-cm / M3*0.5(2X) TORQUE: (6.94–7.81 lb-in.) / 8~9kg-cm (0.78–0.88 Nm) [6.94~7.81lb-in] [0.78~0.88NM] 6.2 [0.24] 19.0 [0.75] Fig.
Page 144 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-12 DIN-Rail Mounting MKM-DRB Applicable for Frame A and B Unit: mm [inch] Screw Torque 72.0[2.83] 8.0[0.31] 8–10 kg-cm M4 x 2 pcs (6.9–8.7 lb-in.) (0.7–98 Nm) Table 7-66 4.6[0.18] (M4 NUT) unit: mm[inch] Fig. 7-102 MKM-DRC Applicable for Frame C Unit: mm [inch]...
Page 145 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Installation Model Screw Torque 14–16 kg-cm MKM-DRB M4 x P0.7 x 2 pcs (12.2–13.8 lb-in.) (1.38–1.56 Nm) 18–20 kg-cm MKM-DRC M5 x P0.8 x 4 pcs (15.7–17.3 lb-in.) (1.77–1.96 Nm) Table 7-68 Fig. 7-104 7-80...
Page 146 However, when you use the mounting adapter plate to change the drive from the VFD-E / VFD-EL series to the MS300 / MH300 series, you can still use the original wiring method. The following table shows the correspondences.
Page 147 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 MKM-MAPC Applicable for frame C Unit: mm [inch] Fig. 7-106 7-82...
Page 148 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Installation Frame A and B Screw Torque 14–16 kg-cm / (12.4–13.9 lb-in.) / (1.37–1.57 Nm) 16–20 kg-cm / (13.9–17.4 lb-in.) / (1.57–1.96 Nm) Table 7-70 Fig. 7-107 7-83...
Page 149 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Frame C Screw Torque 14–16 kg-cm / (12.4–13.9 lb-in.) / (1.37–1.57 Nm) 16–20 kg-cm / (13.9–17.4 lb-in.) / (1.57–1.96 Nm) Table 7-71 Fig. 7-108 7-84...
Page 150 2. Buy a MKC-KPPK model for wall mounting or embedded mounting. Its protection level is IP66. 3. The maximum RJ45 extension lead is 5 m (16ft). 4. This keypad can only be used on Delta’s motor drive C2000, CH2000, CP2000, MS300, MH300, ME300 series, and so on. Keypad Function Description...
Page 151 / deleting user-defined parameters. 2. Other functions must be defined using TPEditor. Download TPEditor software at Delta website. Select TPEditor version 1.60 or later. Refer to the installation instruction for TPEditor in Section 7-14-3.
Page 152 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 LED Function Descriptions Descriptions Steady ON: STOP indicator for the AC motor drive. Blinking: the drive is in standby. Steady OFF: the drive does not execute the “STOP” command. Operation Direction LED 1. Green light: the drive is running forward. 2.
Page 153 1. Start-up screen can only display pictures, not animation. 2. When powered ON, it displays the start-up screen then the main screen. The main screen displays Delta’s default setting F/H/A/U. You can set the display order with Pr.00-03 (Start-up display). When you select the U screen, use the left / right keys to switch between the items, and set the display order for the U screen with Pr.00-04 (User display).
Page 154 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Parameter Setup For example: Setup source for the master frequency command. In the Group 00 Motor Drive Parameter, use Up / Down keys to select parameter 20: Auto Frequency Command. Press to select. Press ENTER to go to this parameter’s setting menu. Press to select the Use the Up / Down keys to choose a setting.
Page 155 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 25. Software brake chopper action level (Pr.07-00) 26. Speed tracking during start-up (Pr.07- 27. Emergency stop (EF) & force to stop selection (Pr.07-20) 28. Torque command filter time (Pr.07-24) 29. Slip compensation filter time (Pr.07-25) 30. Torque compensation gain (Pr.07-26) 31.
Page 156 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 My Mode Items It can save 1–32 sets of parameters (Pr). Setup process 1. Go to Parameter Setup function. Press ENTER to select the parameter to use. There is an ADD on the bottom right Press F4 in parameter corner of the screen.
Page 157 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Application Selection List This function enables you to select application and its parameters sets. Example: In the menu content, select 3: Application Selection List Press ENTER to go into the Application Selection List Select Application Press ENTER to enter the application selection screen, and the selected application industry is “Fan”.
Page 158 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Use the Up / Down keys to select the parameters to check or to change. Press ENTER to enter the parameter. Copy Parameter Four groups of parameters are available to copy The steps are shown in the example below. Example: parameter saved in the motor drive.
Page 159 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Press the Up / Down keys to select a symbol. Press the Left / Right keys to move the cursor to select a file name. String & Symbol Table: ！＂＃＄％＆＇（）＊＋，－．／０１２３４５６７８９：；＜＝＞？＠ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺ［＼］＾＿｀ａｂｃｄｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ｛｜｝～ After you confirm the file name, press ENTER. Begin copying parameters until it is done.
Page 160 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Press the Up / Down keys to select the next error code. After selecting an error code, press ENTER to see that error record’s details. Press the Up / Down keys to see an error record’s details such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage, and DC bus voltage.
Page 161 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Press the Up / Down keys to set the Minute Press the Up / Down keys to set the Second Press ENTER to confirm the Time Setup. NOTE: Limitation: The charging process for the keypad super capacitor finishes in about 6 minutes.
Page 162 10. PLC Function When activating and stopping the PLC function (choosing 2: PLC Run or 3: PLC Stop), the PLC status displays on main screen (Delta default setting). Choose option 2: PLC Run to enable the PLC function. Press the Up /Down keys to select a PLC function, and then press ENTER.
Page 163 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 After copying is done, the keypad automatically returns to this screen. NOTE: If you select “Option 1: KeypadVFD”, check if the PLC program is built-in to the KPC-CC01 keypad. If the PLC program is not available in the keypad when you select “Option 1: KeypadVFD”, an “ERR8 Warning: Type Mismatch”...
Page 164 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 After copying is done, the keypad automatically returns to this screen. Press the Right key to see the date of the program copied. Press the Right key to see the time of program copied. 12. Display setup 1.
Page 165 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Press the Up / Down keys to adjust the setting value. When the setting value is 0 Min, the backlight remains on. When the setting value is 10 Min, the backlight turns off in 10 minutes. 3.
Page 166 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530 Refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more details. TPEditor Download TPEditor software at Delta website. Select TPEditor version 1.60 or later. Refer to the installation instruction for TPEditor in Section 7-14-3. 14. Main page 1. Default page 60.00Hz...
Page 167 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 15. PC Link 1. TPEditor: This function enables you to connect the keypad to a computer then download and edit user-defined screens. Press ENTER to go to Waiting to connect to PC screen. In TPEditor, from the Communication menu, choose Write to HMI. In the Confirm message box, click YES.
Page 168 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 3. Connecting the KPC-CCO1 to a computer Select 2: VFDSoft, and then press ENTER. Press the Up / Down keys to select a parameter group to upload to VFDSoft. Press ENTER to go to Waiting to connect to PC screen.
Page 169 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 In Parameter Manager, from the Table menu, choose Read from KPC-CC01. Choose the correct communication port and click OK. Start to upload parameters to VFDSoft Uploading parameter is completed Before using the user-defined start-up screen and user-defined main screen, you must preset the start-up screen and the main screen as user- defined.
Page 170 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 16. Start Wizard (applicable for MH300 firmware V1.04 and later) 16.1 New drive start-up setting process When a new drive is powered on, it directly enters the Start Wizard. There are three modes in the start-up setting process: Start Wizard, Exit Wizard and Test Mode. (1) Start Wizard: In Start Wizard, you can set drive’s parameters such as Calendar, Maximum operation ...
Page 171 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Flow chart for the above setting process: 7-106...
Page 172 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 16.2 Re-start Start Wizard NOTE: The “16: Start Wizard” on the menu is to set whether the screen shows start wizard when powering on the drive. 7-107...
Page 173 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Other displays When a fault occurs, the screen display shows the fault or warning: 1. Press the STOP / RESET key to reset the fault code. If there is no response, contact your local distributor or return the unit to the factory.
Page 174 1. Run TPEditor version 1.60 or later by double-clicking the program icon. 2. On the File menu, click New. In the New project dialog box, for Set Device Type, select DELTA VFD-C Inverter. For TP Type, select VFD-C KeyPad. For File Name, enter TPE0 and then click OK.
Page 175 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 5. Add static text. Open a blank page (step 3), then on the toolbar click . Double-click the blank page to display the Static Text Setting dialog box, and then enter the static text. 6. Add a static bitmap. Open a blank page (step 3), then on the toolbar, click .
Page 176 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 8. When you finish editing the start-up screen, on the Communication menu, click Input User Defined Keypad Starting Screen. 9. Download the new setting: On the Tool menu, click Communication. Set up the communication port and speed for the IFD6530.
Page 177 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Edit the Main Page and Download to the Keypad In the Editor, add a page to edit. On the Edit menu, click Add a New Page. You can also right-click on the TP page in the upper right corner of the Design window and click Add to add one more pages to edit. This keypad currently supports up to 256 pages.
Page 178 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Scale Setting. On the toolbar, click to add a scale. You can also edit the Scale Setting in the Property Window on the right-hand side of your computer screen. Scale Position: specifies where to place the scale. Scale Side: specifies whether the scale is numbered from smaller numbers to larger numbers or from larger to smaller.
Page 179 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Refer Device: specifies the VFD communication port. Direction Setting: specifies the direction: From Bottom to Top, From Top to Bottom, From Left to Right or From Right to Left. Max Value and Min Value: specifies the maximum value and minimum value. A value smaller than or equal to the minimum value causes the bar graph to be blank (0).
Page 180 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 B. Constant setting This function specifies the memory address’ values for the VFD or PLC. When you press the Function Key, it writes a value to the memory address specified by the value for Constant Setting. You can use this function to initialize a variable.
Page 181 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Unit Measurement: on the toolbar, click Open a new blank page, and double-click on that window to display the Units Setting dialog box. Choose the Metrology Type and the Unit Name. For Metrology, the choices are Length, Square Measure, Volume/Solid Measure, Weight, Speed, Time, and Temperature.
Page 182 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 For example, if you set Function Key to F1, Min Value to 0 and Max Value to 4, when you press F1 on the keypad, then you can press Up/Down on the keypad to increase or decrease the value. Press ENTER on the keypad to confirm your setting.
Page 183 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-14-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions Fault Codes LCD Display * Fault Name Description Corrective Actions Error in the keypad’s flash memory. 1. Press RESET to clear the errors. 2. Check for any problem on Flash IC. Flash memory Keypad flash memory read error...
Page 184 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 Warning Codes LCD Display * Warning Name Description Corrective Actions Motor drive does not accept the communication command sent from the keypad. 1. Verify that the keypad is properly connected to Communication RS-485 Modbus the motor drive by a communication cable error 1 illegal function such as RJ45.
Page 185 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 LCD Display * Warning Name Description Corrective Actions Motor drive cannot process the communication command sent from the keypad. 1. Verify that the keypad is properly connected to the motor drive by a communication cable Communication RS-485 Modbus such as RJ45.
Page 186 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 File Copy Setting Fault Description: These faults occur when KPC-CC01 cannot perform the command after clicking the ENTER key in the copy function. LCD Display * Fault Name Description Corrective Actions The parameter / file is read-only and cannot be written to.
Page 187 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 LCD Display * Fault Name Description Corrective Actions Data to be copied are not the correct type, so the setting cannot be changed. 1. Check if the products’ serial numbers to be File type copied are in the same category. If they are mismatch File type mismatch in the same category, try to copy the setting...
Page 188 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 7-14-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor with the KPC-CC01 1. Local Page Setting and Global Setting functions are not supported. 2. In the Communication menu, Read from TP function is not supported. 3. In the RTC Display Setting, you cannot change the Refer Device. 7-123...
Page 189 Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 7-124...
Page 190 -- Communication Extension Card, DeviceNet 8-11 CMM-EIP02 -- Communication Extension Card, (Single-port) EtherNet/IP, Modbus-TCP 8-12 CMM-EIP03 -- Communication Extension Card, (Dual-port) EtherNet/IP, Modbus-TCP 8-13 CMM-PD02 -- Communication Extension Card, Profibus 8-14 CMM-EC02 -- Communication Extension Card, EtherCAT 8-15 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables...
Page 191 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 The option cards in this chapter are optional accessories. Select the applicable option cards for  your motor drive, or contact your local distributor for suggestions. The option cards can significantly improve the efficiency of the motor drive. To prevent damage to the motor drive during installation, remove the digital keypad and the cover ...
Page 192 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Mounting Position of Option Cards Frame A–D Frame E–I Mounting position 1, 2 (Option card installing kit) Mounting position 1, 2 (Option card installing kit) Figure 8-1 Figure 8-2 NOTE: Position 2 is only applicable for the installation of communication cards and power extension card. The Wiring of Communication Card MH300 Control Board Connector Option Card Connector...
Page 193 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300  Communication Card Cables To correctly use the communication cards, you must purchase the communication card along with the connection cables. Check your communication card models first. Then, select your applicable connection cables according to the mounting positions by different frames. Two cable length are available for your choice.
Page 194 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300  Power Card Cables An option card mounting box, a connector and cables with two different lengths are included when you purchase the power card EMM-BPS02 (DC 24 V backup power supply card), so you do not need to purchase it with the connection cables.
Page 195 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-1-1 PG / I/O / RELAY Card - Mounting Position 1 Installation method: Front-mounting the option card, by inserting to a connector on the control board. As shown in the Figure 8-9, switch off the power of the motor drive, and then remove the front cover. Mounting the connector: as shown in the Figure 8-10, aim the option card at the connector on the control board and then insert it to the connector.
Page 196 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-1-2 Power Adapter - Mounting position 1 Installation method: Back-mounting the option card, by inserting to a connector on the control board. As shown in the Figure 8-15, shut down the power of the motor drive, and then remove the front cover. Mounting the connector: as shown in the Figure 8-16, aim the option card at the connector on the control board and then insert it to the connector.
Page 197 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-1-3 Communication Card - Mounting position 1 Installation method: Back-mounting the option card, by inserting to a flat Cables on the control board. As shown in the Figure 8-21, shut down the power of the motor drive, and then remove the front cover. Assembling connection cables: Connect the connector at one end of the connection cable to the control board connector.
Page 198 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-1-4 Communication Card & Power Adapter - Mounting position 2 Installation method: Front-mounting the option card, by inserting to a flat Cables on the control board. Frame A–D As shown in the Figure 8-26, shut down the power of the motor drive and then remove the front cover. Assembling option cards: Detach the upper cover of the installation box for option card by slipping and place the terminal block and connector of the option card upward.
Page 199 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Frame E–I As shown in the Figure 8-32, shut down the power of the motor drive and then remove the front cover. Assembling connection cables: Connect the connector at one end of the connection cable to the control board connector.
Page 200 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 NOTE: You must ground the option cards listed below when wiring. The ground terminal is included with  option card as shown in Figure 8-38 1. CMM-PD02 7. EMM-PG01L Point A 2. CMM-DN02 8. EMM-PG01O 3. CMM-EIP02 9.
Page 201 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Frame G Frame H–I Figure 8-42 Figure 8-43 Torque (±10%) Torque (±10%) Frame G: 14–16 kg-cm / (12.15–13.89 Ib-in.) / Frame H–I: 4–6 kg-cm / (3.47–5.21 Ib-in.) / (1.37–1.57 Nm) (0.39–0.59 Nm) 8-12...
Page 202 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-2 EMM-PG01L -- PG Card (Line Driver) 8-2-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Terminal block 5. Ground terminal block Figure 8-45 Wire: 0.25–0.75 mm / (24–18 AWG) Stripping length: 9 mm Figure 8-44 8-2-2 Terminal Descriptions...
Page 203 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 PG1 Wiring Diagram  Figure 8-46 and Figure 8-47 show the wiring diagrams for using open collector encoder. 5~12V Figure 8-46 Ext. Power (5–24V) Figure 8-47 PG2 Wiring Diagram  Ext. Power (5–24V) Figure 8-48 8-14...
Page 204 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-2-3 EMM-PG01L Wiring Diagram Use a shielded cable to prevent interference.  Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size: 0.0509–1.31 mm / (30–16 AWG). ...
Page 205 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-3 EMM-PG01O -- PG Card (Open Collector) 8-3-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Terminal block 5. Ground terminal block Figure 8-51 Figure 8-50 Wire: 0.25–0.75 mm / (24–18 AWG) Stripping length: 9 mm 8-3-2 Terminal Descriptions...
Page 206 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 PG1 Wiring Diagram  Figure 8-52 Ext. Power Ext. Power (5–24V) (5–24V) Figure 8-53 Figure 8-54 PG2 Wiring Diagram  Ext. Power (5–24V) Figure 8-55 8-17...
Page 207 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-3-3 EMM-PG01O Wiring Diagram Use a shielded cable to prevent interference.  Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size: 0.0509–1.31 mm 30–16 AWG ...
Page 208 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-4 EMM-PG01R -- PG Card (Resolver / Encoder Signal Input) 8-4-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Terminal block 5. Ground terminal block Figure 8-58 Wire: 0.25–0.75 mm / (24–18 AWG) Stripping length: 9 mm Figure 8-57...
Page 209 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 PG2 Wiring Diagram  Ext. Power (5–24V) Figure 8-59 DOS (Degradation of Signal): If the amplitude of the sine wave input of the S1- / S3 and S2- / S4 is lower than or higher than the encoder IC’s specification, a red light turns on.
Page 210 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-4-3 EMM-PG01R Wiring Diagram Use a shielded cable to prevent interference.  Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size: 0.0509–1.31 mm / (30–16 AWG) ...
Page 211 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-5 EMM-D33A -- Extension for 3-point Digital Input / 3-point Digital Output 8-5-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Terminal block 5. Ground terminal block Figure 8-62 Figure 8-61 Wire: 0.25–0.75 mm / (24–18 AWG)
Page 212 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-6 EMM-A22A -- Extension for 2 Sets of Analog Input / 2 Sets of Analog Output 8-6-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Terminal block 5. Switch (SSW1– SSW4) Figure 8-64 Wire: 0.25–0.75 mm...
Page 213 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-7 EMM-R2CA -- Relay Output Extension (2-point N.C. Output Terminal) 8-7-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Terminal block Figure 8-66 Figure 8-65 Wire: 0.25–1.5 mm / (24–16 AWG) Stripping length: 6 mm Torque: 5 kg-cm / (4.3 Ib-in.) / (0.49 Nm)
Page 214 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-8 EMM-R3AA -- Relay Output Extension (3-point N.O. Output Terminal) 8-8-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Terminal block Figure 8-68 Figure 8-67 Wire: 0.25–1.5 mm / (24–16 AWG) Stripping length: 6 mm Torque: 5 kg-cm / (4.3 Ib-in.) / (0.49 Nm)
Page 215 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-9 EMM-BPS02 -- +24V Power Extension Card 8-9-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port (Refer to subsection 8-1-2 for installation) 4. AC motor drive connection port (Refer Figure 8-70 to subsection 8-1-4 for Figure 8-69...
Page 216 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-9-4 The Cable Connection of +24V Power Card +24V terminal block Figure 8-71 Figure 8-72 Figure 8-73 ○ ○ ○ Operating procedures (refer to the mark in the Figure 8-72) ○ Choose the power supply or the host to connect the positive and negative electrodes to +24V power card.
Page 217 Torque: 2 kg-cm / (1.7 Ib-in.) / (0.2 Nm) 8-10-2 Features Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta’s HSSP protocol, the AC motor drive can be controlled in real-time. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange.
Page 218 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Electrical Specification Power supply voltage 15 V (supplied by AC motor drive) Insulation voltage 500 V Communication wire 0.85 W power consumption Power consumption Weight 23 g Table 8-17 Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6)
Page 219 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-10-5 LED Indicator Light & Troubleshooting There are three LED indicator lights on CMM-DN02. POWER LED displays the status of the working power. MS LED and NS LED are dual-color LEDs, displaying the connection status and error messages of the communication module.
Page 220 1 Port Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100 M Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP, Delta Network protocol Configuration Table 8-22 Electrical Specification Weight 25 g...
Page 221 Operation command The operation command is controlled by 00-21 source the communication card. Decoding method for The decoding method for Delta AC motor 09-30 communication drive 09-75 IP setting Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1) 09-76 IP address 1 IP address 192.168.1.5...
Page 222 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Parameter Function Current Set Value Definition of Parameter Values 09-78 IP address 3 IP address 192.168.1.5 09-79 IP address 4 IP address 192.168.1.5 09-80 Netmask 1 Netmask 255.255.255.0 09-81 Netmask 2 Netmask 255.255.255.0 09-82 Netmask 3 Netmask 255.255.255.0 09-83 Netmask 4...
Page 223 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Troubleshooting Abnormality Cause Corrective Action The CMM-EIP02 does not Make sure the CMM-EIP02 correctly connects to connect to the network the network. Cannot find The PC and the CMM-EIP02 communication card Search by IP or set up relevant settings using the are in different networks and AC motor drive keypad.
Page 224 2 Ports Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100 M Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP, Delta Network protocol Configuration Table 8-29 Electrical Specification Weight 30 g...
Page 225 Operation command The operation command is controlled by 00-21 source the communication card. Decoding method for The decoding method for Delta AC motor 09-30 communication drive 09-75 IP setting Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1) 09-76 IP address 1 IP address 192.168.1.5...
Page 226 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Parameter Function Current Set Value Definition of Parameter Values 09-78 IP address 3 IP address 192.168.1.5 09-79 IP address 4 IP address 192.168.1.5 09-80 Netmask 1 Netmask 255.255.255.0 09-81 Netmask 2 Netmask 255.255.255.0 09-82 Netmask 3 Netmask 255.255.255.0 09-83 Netmask 4...
Page 227 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Troubleshooting Abnormality Cause Corrective Action The CMM-EIP03 does not Make sure the CMM-EIP03 correctly connects to connect to the network the network. Cannot find The PC and the CMM-EIP03 communication card Search by IP or set up relevant settings using the are in different networks and AC motor drive keypad.
Page 228 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-13 CMM-PD02 -- Communication Extension Card, Profibus 8-13-1 Product Profile Screw fixing hole Positioning hole AC motor drive connection port Communication Port Indicator light: NET1 Indicator light: POWER Figure 8-86 Ground terminal block Wire: 0.25–0.5 mm / (24–20 AWG) Stripping length: 7–8 mm Figure 8-85...
Page 229 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-6) Operation: -10–50º C (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation / Storage Storage: -25–70º C (temperature), 95% (humidity) Shock / Vibration International standards: resistance...
Page 230 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-14 CMM-EC02 -- Communication Extension Card, EtherCAT 8-14-1 Product Profile 1. Screw fixing hole 2. Positioning hole 3. AC motor drive connection port 4. Communication Port Figure 8-89 5. Indicator lights Wire: 0.25–0.5 mm / (24–20 AWG) 6.
Page 231 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-14-4 RJ45 PIN Definition Signal Definition Data transmit positive Data transmit negative Data receive positive Data receive negative Figure 8-90 Table 8-46 8-14-5 Communication Parameter Settings when MH300 Connects to EtherCAT When operating MH300 with a CMM-EC02 card, you should set the control source and operation source to be controlled by the communication card.
Page 232 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 Status Indication Network connection is in normal status LINK-OUT Green Flashes Network is in operation Doesn’t connect to network Table 8-48 8-14-6 Network Connection Pay attention to the connection method for EtherCAT because its packet delivery is directional. When front-mounting the communication card, the delivery direction for CMM-EC02 is from left (IN) to right (OUT).
Page 233 Chapter 8 Option CardsMH300 8-15 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables Delta Cables Part Number Description Length UC-CMC003-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 0.3 m UC-CMC005-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 0.5 m UC-CMC010-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector UC-CMC015-01A CANopen cable, RJ45 connector 1.5 m...
Page 234 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 Chapter 9 Specification 9-1 115V Models 9-2 230V Models 9-3 460V Models 9-4 General Specifications 9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation 9-6 Derating Curve...
Page 235 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 9-1 115V Models 115V, single-phase Frame 1A6MH11_ _ 2A5MH11_ _ 5A0MH11_ _ Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _SAA Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.75 Applicable Motor Output (HP) Rated Output Capacity (kVA) Heavy duty Rated Output Current (A) Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2–15 (Default: 4)
Page 236 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 9-2 230V Models 230V, single-phase Frame 1A6MH21_ _ 2A8MH21_ _ 5A0MH21_ _ Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _SAA 1A6MH21AF 2A8MH21AF Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.75 Applicable Motor Output (HP) Rated Output Capacity (kVA) Heavy Duty Rated Output Current (A) Carrier Frequency (kHz)
Page 237 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 230V, three-phase Frame 1A6MH23_ _ _ _ 2A8MH23_ _ _ _ 5A0MH23_ _ _ _ 7A5MH23_ _ _ _ Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _A ANSA ENSA ANSA ENSA ANSN ENSN ANSA ENSA...
Page 238 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 230V, three-phase Frame Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _SAA 75AMH23AN_ _ 90AMH23AN_ _ 120MH23AN_ _ 146MH23AN_ _ Applicable Motor Output (kW) 18.5 37 (45) * Applicable Motor Output (HP) 50 (60) * Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 28.9 34.4...
Page 239 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 9-3 460V Models 460V, three-phase Frame 1A5MH43_ _ _ _ 3A0MH43_ _ _ _ Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _A 1A5MH43AFSA 3A0MH43AFSA ANSA ENSA ANSN ENSN ANSA ENSA Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.75 0.75 0.75...
Page 240 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 460V, three-phase Frame 25AMH43_ _ 32AMH43_ _ 38AMH43_ _ 45AMH43_ _ Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _SAA Applicable Motor Output (kW) 18.5 Applicable Motor Output (HP) Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 19.1 24.4 34.3 Heavy Rated Output Current (A)
Page 241 1. Control accuracy may vary depending on the environment, application conditions, different motors or encoders. For details, contact our company or your local distributor. 2. For information on Certifications and Declaration of Conformity (DoC), visit Delta | Download Center (deltaww.com)
Page 242 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation DO NOT expose the AC motor drive to bad environmental conditions, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive / inflammable gasses, humidity, liquid or vibration. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01 mg/ cm every year.
Page 243 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 9-6 Derating for Ambient Temperature and Altitude For more information on calculation for derating curve, refer to Pr.06-55.  When choosing the correct model, consider factors such as ambient temperature, altitude, carrier  frequency, control mode, and so on. That is, Actual rated current for application (A) = Rated output current (A) x Ambient temp.
Page 244 High Altitude by 0.5°C for every 100 m increase in altitude. The maximum altitude for corner grounding is 2000 m. If installing at an altitude higher than 2000 m is required, contact Delta for more information. Table 9-12 Fig. 9-2...
Page 245 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 Carrier frequency derating curve Normal duty (Pr.00-16 = 0) Space vector pulse width modulation (SVPWM) mode  230V models Fig. 9-3 In normal duty, the rated output current of SVPWM mode in different carrier frequency. (Unit: %) Fc (kHz) Ambient temperature (Ta)
Page 246 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 Dual pulse-width modulation (DPWM) mode  230V models Fig. 9-5 In normal duty, the rated output current of DPWM mode in different carrier frequency. (Unit: %) Fc (kHz) Ambient temperature (Ta) 100% load 50°C 40°C Table 9-18 460V models Fig.
Page 247 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 Heavy duty (Pr.00-16 = 1) Space vector pulse width modulation (SVPWM) mode  230V models Fig. 9-7 In heavy duty, the rated output current of SVPWM mode in different carrier frequency. (Unit: %) Fc (kHz) Ambient temperature (Ta) 100% load 50°C...
Page 248 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 Dual pulse-width modulation (DPWM) mode  230V models Fig. 9-9 In heavy duty, the rated output current of DPWM mode in different carrier frequency. (Unit: %) Fc (kHz) Ambient temperature (Ta) 100% load 50°C 100 100 40°C 100 100 Table 9-22...
Page 249 Chapter 9 Specification MH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 9-16...
Page 250 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 Chapter 10 Digital Keypad 10-1 KPMH-LC01 Keypad 10-2 Descriptions of Keypad Functions 10-3 Keypad Operation Process 10-4 Reference Table for the 16-segment Digital Keypad LED Display 10-1...
Page 251 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 10-1 KPMH-LC01 Keyboard 10-2 Descriptions of Keypad Functions Displayed items Descriptions Displays the present frequency setting for the drive F WD R EV ST OP Displays the actual frequency output to the motor F WD R EV Displays the user-defined output of a physical quantity RU N ST OP...
Page 252 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 10-3 Keypad Operation Process A. Main Page Selection 10-3...
Page 253 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 B. F Page (Frequency command setting page) General Mode 1 (maximum operating frequency Pr.01-00 is 2 digits; for example, Pr.01-00 = 60.00 Hz) General Mode 2 (maximum operating frequency 01-00 is 3 digits; for example, Pr.01-00 = 599.0 Hz) 10-4...
Page 254 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 C. Application Selection Page The Application Selection page displays APP, but does not show the APP page when Pr.13-00 = 0 The description of Pr.13-00 setting is as follows: Pr.13-00 = 0 The application selection is inactive and does not show on the display. Pr.13-00 = 1 specifies a user-defined application, and the keypad displays “USER”.
Page 255 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 Pr.13-00 = 9 specifies the PCB Machine application, and the keypad displays “PCB”. When Pr.13-00 is not 0, the corresponding parameters appear in the APP page according to the setting for Pr.13-00. In each selected application, you can view the parameters by pressing the digital dial button.
Page 256 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 Follow the process below to set specific application selection (Pr.13-00 = 2–8). After selecting your application, press MODE to return to the APP Rotate the digital dial to Set Pr.13-00 = 2-8 page. Then, press digital dial to select the defined (2–8 represent different enter into the industry-specific...
Page 257 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 The upper limit for Pr.03-03 is 100.0 and lower limit is -100.0. If the value is more than 100.0 or less than -100.0, “Err” appears after you press the digital dial, and then the keypad shows the upper limit (100.0) or lower limit (-100.0) for a second to remind you of the incorrect setting.
Page 258 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 10-4 Reference Table for the 16-segment Digital Keypad LED Display Number 16-segment display Alphabet 16-segment display － Alphabet 16-segment display － Alphabet 16-segment display －－－ Alphabet 16-segment display －－ Alphabet 16-segment display －－...
Page 259 Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 10-10...
Page 260 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings 00 Drive Parameters 01 Basic Parameters 02 Digital Input / Output Parameters 03 Analog Input / Output Parameters 04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters 05 Motor Parameters 06 Protection Parameters (1) 07 Special Parameters 08 High-function PID Parameters 09 Communication Parameters...
Page 261 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 This chapter provides a summary of parameter (Pr.) setting ranges and defaults. You can set, change, and reset parameters through the digital keypad. NOTE: 1. : You can set this parameter during operation. 2. See Chapter 12 for more details about parameter settings. 3.
Page 262 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 409: 460 V, 3 Phase, 10 HP 410: 460 V, 3 Phase, 15 HP 411: 460 V, 3 Phase, 20 HP 412: 460 V, 3 Phase, 25 HP 413: 460 V, 3 Phase, 30 HP 414: 460V, 3 Phase, 40 HP 415: 460V, 3 Phase, 50 HP 416: 460V, 3 Phase, 60 HP...
Page 263 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 8: Display the drive’s estimated output torque%, motor’s rated torque is 100% (t) (unit: %) 9: Display PG feedback (G) (unit: PLS) (refer to Pr.10-00–10-01) 10: Display PID feedback (b) (unit: %) 11: Display signal value of AVI analog input terminal (1.) (unit: %) 12: Display signal value of ACI analog input terminal (2.)
Page 264 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 40: Torque command (L.) (unit: %) 41: kWh (J) (unit: kWh) 42: PID target value (h.) (unit: %) 43: PID offset (o.) (unit: %) 44: PID output frequency (b.) (unit: Hz) 46: Auxiliary frequency value (U.) (unit: Hz) 47: Master frequency value (A) (unit: Hz) 48: Frequency value after addition and subtraction of...
Page 265 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: IM TQCPG (IM Torque control + encoder) 00-13 Torque control mode 1: PM TQCPG (PM Torque control + encoder) 2: IMTQC sensorless (IM sensorless torque control) 0: Normal duty 00-16 Duty selection 1: Heavy duty...
Page 266 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Digital keypad frequency 00-24 Read only Read only command memory bit 0–3: user-defined decimal places 0000h --- 0000b: no decimal place 0001h --- 0001b: one decimal place 0002h --- 0010b: two decimal places 0003h --- 0011b: three decimal places bit 4–15: user-defined unit 000xh: Hz...
Page 267 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 020xh: L/h 021xh: m3/s 022xh: m3/h 023xh: GPM 024xh: CFM xxxxh: Hz 0: Disable 0–65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place) Maximum user-defined 00-26 0.0–6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place) value 0.00–655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal places) 0.000–65.535 (when Pr.00-25 set to 3 decimal places)
Page 268 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Digital keypad 1: External terminals 2: RS-485 communication Operation command 3: CANopen communication card 00-31 source 5: Communication card (CANopen card not included) (HAND, LOCAL) NOTE: HOA (Hand-Off-Auto) function is valid only when you use with MO function setting 41 and 56 or with KPC-CC01 (optional).
Page 269 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 01 Basic Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default Motor 1 maximum 60.00 / 01-00 0.00–599.00 Hz operation frequency 50.00 Motor 1 rated / base 60.00 / 01-01 0.00–599.00 Hz frequency 50.00 Motor 1 rated / base 115V / 230V models: 0.0–255.0 V 220.0 01-02...
Page 270 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec. 01-20 JOG acceleration time 10.00  Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.00–6000.00 sec. Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec. 01-21 JOG deceleration time 10.00  Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.00–6000.00 sec. 01-22 JOG frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz...
Page 271 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Motor 2 mid-point 01-39 0.00–599.00 Hz 1.50 frequency 2 Motor 2 mid-point voltage 115 / 230 V models: 0.0–240.0 V 01-40  460 V models: 0.0–480.0 V 10.0 Motor 2 Minimum output 01-41 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.50...
Page 272 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Motor 3 mid-point voltage 115 / 230 V models: 0.0–240.0 V 01-59  460 V models: 0.0–480.0 V 10.0 Motor 3 minimum output 01-60 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.50 frequency Motor 3 minimum output 115 / 230 V models: 0.0–240.0 V 01-61 ...
Page 273 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: voltage decrease to 0 first, then frequency decrease to V/F separated mode stop 01-76 method 1: voltage and frequency decrease to 0 at the same time The deceleration time of 01-77 VFSM over-current stall 1.00–600.00...
Page 274 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 02 Digital Input / Output Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Two-wire mode 1, power ON for operation control (M1: FWD / STOP, M2: REV / STOP) 2: Two-wire mode 2, power ON for operation control (M1: RUN / STOP, M2: FWD / REV) 3: Three-wire, power ON for operation control (M1: RUN, M2: REV / FWD, M3: STOP)
Page 275 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Input terminal of extension 16: Rotating speed command from ACI 02-27 card (MI11) 18: Forced to stop (Pr.07-20) Input terminal of extension 19: Frequency up command 02-28 card (MI12) 20: Frequency down command 21: PID function disabled 22: Clear the counter...
Page 276 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 74: Reverse PID feedback 78: Multi-step position confirmation 79: Position / speed mode switching (0: Speed mode, 1: Position mode) 80: Location command source switching (increase) (0: Internal register, 1: External pulse input) 83: Multi-motors (IM) selection bit 0 84: Multi-motors (IM) selection bit 1 86: Enable initial reel diameter...
Page 277 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Output terminal of 9: Drive is ready 02-37 extension card (MO11) or 10: Low voltage warning (Lv) (Pr.06-00)  (RY11) 11: Malfunction indication 13: Over-heat warning (Pr.06-15) Output terminal of 02-38 extension card (MO12) or 14: Software brake signal indication (Pr.07-00)
Page 278 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 68: SO output logic B 69: Maximum reel diameter reached 70: Empty reel diameter reached 71: Broken belt detection 72: Tension PID feedback error 73: Over-torque 3 74: Over-torque 4 Multi-function output 02-18 0000h–FFFFh (0: N.O.;...
Page 279 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Display the external 02-52 multi-function input Monitor the status of PLC input terminals Read only terminals used by PLC Display the external 02-53 multi-function output Monitor the status of PLC output terminals Read only terminals used by PLC Display the Frequency...
Page 280 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 03 Analog Input / Output Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Frequency command 2: Torque command (torque limit in speed mode) 3: Torque compensation command 4: PID target value 03-00 AVI analog input selection ...
Page 281 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 03-15 AVI analog input filter time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01  03-16 ACI analog input filter time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01  Analog input addition 0: Disable (AVI, ACI) 03-18  function 1: Enable (analog extension card not included) 0: Disable...
Page 282 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: 4–20 mA ACI terminal input 03-29 1: 0–10 V  selection 2: 0–20 mA Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals bit 1: AFM PLC analog output 03-30 Read only bit 2: AO10...
Page 283 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 03-65 AVI voltage mid-point 0.00–10.00 V 5.00  AVI voltage proportional 03-66 -100.00–100.00% 50.00  mid-point 03-67 AVI voltage highest point 0.00–10.00 V 10.00  AVI voltage proportional 03-68 -100.00–100.00% 100.00 ...
Page 284 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 04-00 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00  04-01 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00  04-02 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00  04-03 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00...
Page 285 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 05 Motor Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Dynamic test for induction motor (IM) 2: Static test for induction motor (IM) 05-00 Motor parameter auto-tuning 4: Dynamic test for PM synchronous motor magnetic pole 5: Rolling auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM) motor 12: FOC sensorless inertia estimation 13: High frequency stall test for PM synchronous motor...
Page 286 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Number of poles for 05-16 2–20 induction motor 2 Depending No-load current for induction on the 05-17 0.00–Pr.05-13 default model motor 2 (A) power Depending Stator resistance (Rs) for on the 05-18 0.000–65.535 Ω...
Page 287 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Accumulated motor 05-32 0–65535 days operation time (days) Induction motor (IM) or 0: Induction motor permanent magnet 05-33 1: SPM synchronous motor 2: IPM selection Full-load current for a Depending on the 05-34...
Page 288 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Depending No-load current for induction on the 05-68 0.00–Pr.05-64 default model motor 3 (A) power Depending Stator resistance (Rs) for on the 05-69 0.000–65.535 Ω model induction motor 3 power Depending Full-load current for...
Page 289 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 06 Protection Parameters (1) Parameter Name Setting Range Default 115V / 230V models: 150.0–220.0 V 180.0 06-00 Low voltage level  460V models: 300.0–440.0 V 360.0 0: Disabled Over-voltage stall 06-01 115V / 230V models: 0.0–390.0 V 380.0 ...
Page 290 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed operation 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed Over-torque detection 06-09  selection (motor 2) operation 3: Continue operation after over-torque detection during 4: Stop after over-torque detection during RUN Over-torque detection level...
Page 291 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 16: IGBT overheating (oH1) 17: Heatsink overheating (oH2) 18: IGBT temperature detection failure ( tH1o) 19: Capacitor hardware error (tH2o) 21: Drive over-load (oL) 22: Electronic thermal relay 1 protection (EoL1) 23: Electronic thermal relay 2 protection (EoL2) 24: Motor overheating (PTC / PT100) (oH3) 26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
Page 292 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 77: STO Loss 2 (STL2) 78: STO Loss 3 (STL3) 79: U-phase Over-current before run (Aoc) 80: V-phase Over-current before run (boc) 81: W-phase Over-current before run (coc) 82: U-phase output phase loss (oPL1) 83: V-phase output phase loss (oPL2) 84: W-phase output phase loss (oPL3) 87: Low frequency overload protection (oL3)
Page 293 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Warn and continue operation 1: Warn and ramp to stop 06-29 PTC detection selection  2: Warn and coast to stop 3: No warning 06-30 PTC level 0.0–100.0% 50.0 ...
Page 294 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Disable 06-49 LvX auto-reset  1: Enable Treatment for phase loss 0: Fault and ramp to stop 06-53  protection (OrP) 1: Fault and coast to stop 0: Constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load current and temperature 1: Constant carrier frequency and limit load current by 06-55...
Page 295 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Warn and coast to stop 06-73 Low current action  2: Warn and ramp to stop by the 2 deceleration time 3: Warn and continue operation Operation time of fault 06-90 0–65535 days...
Page 296 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 07 Special Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 115V / 230V models: 350.0–450.0 V 370.0 07-00 Software brake level  460V models: 700.0–900.0 V 740.0 07-01 DC brake current level 0–100%  07-02 DC brake time at RUN 0.0–60.0 sec.
Page 297 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 07-17 Dwell time at deceleration 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00  Dwell frequency at 07-18 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00  deceleration 0: Fan is always ON 1: Fan is OFF after AC motor drive stops for one minute. 2: Fan is ON when AC motor drive runs;...
Page 298 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 07-33 Auto-restart interval of fault 0.0–6000.0 sec. 60.0  PMSVC voltage feed 07-38 1.00 0.00–2.00 forward gain 07-62 dEb gain (Kp) 0–65535 8000  07-63 dEb gain (Ki) 0–65535 ...
Page 299 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 08 High-function PID Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr.03-00) 2: Negative PID feedback: by single-phase pulse input (MI7), without direction (Pr.10-16) 3: Negative PID feedback: by single -phase pulse input (MI7), with direction (Pr.10-16) Terminal selection of PID 08-00...
Page 300 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default PID compensation 0: Parameter setting 08-16  selection 1: Analog input 08-17 PID compensation -100.0–100.0%  Sleep mode function 0: Refer to PID output command 08-18 setting 1: Refer to PID feedback signal 08-19 Wake-up integral limit 0.0–200.0%...
Page 301 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Master and auxiliary 08-67 reverse running cutoff 0.0–100.0% 10.0  frequency 08-68 PID deviation limit 0.00–100.00% 0.00  08-69 Integral separation level 0.00–100.00% 0.00  08-70 Smart start-up level 0.00–100.00% 5.00 Smart start-up frequency...
Page 302 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 09 Communication Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 09-00 Communication address 1–254  09-01 COM1 transmission speed 4.8–115.2 Kbps  0: Warn and continue operation COM1 transmission fault 1: Fault and ramp to stop 09-02 ...
Page 303 0: 1 Mbps 1: 500 Kbps 2: 250 Kbps 09-37 CANopen speed 3: 125 Kbps 4: 100 Kbps (Delta only) 5: 50 Kbps bit 0: CANopen software disconnection 1 (CANopen guarding time-out) bit 1: CANopen software disconnection 2 (CANopen heartbeat time-out)
Page 304 Communication card – DeviceNet: 0 09-70 address (for DeviceNet or  – PROFIBUS-DP: 1 PROFIBUS) Standard DeviceNet: 0: 125 Kbps DeviceNet speed setting 09-71 1: 250 Kbps  (for DeviceNet) 2: 500 Kbps 3: 1 Mbps (Delta only) 11-45...
Page 305 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Non-standard DeviceNet (Delta only): 0: 10 Kbps 1: 20 Kbps 2: 50 Kbps 3: 100 Kbps 4: 125 Kbps 5: 250 Kbps 6: 500 Kbps 7: 800 Kbps 8: 1 Mbps...
Page 306 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Communication card 09-84 gateway address 1 0–255  (for EtherNet) Communication card 09-85 gateway address 2 0–255  (for EtherNet) Communication card 09-86 gateway address 3 0–255  (for EtherNet) Communication card 09-87 gateway address 4...
Page 307 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Disabled 1: ABZ 10-00 Encoder type selection 3: Resolver 1 x PM encoder 5: Pulse input (MI7) Encoder pulses per 10-01 1–20000 revolution 0: Disable 1: Phases A and B are pulse inputs, forward direction if A-phase leads B-phase by 90 degrees.
Page 308 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: No function 10-10 Encoder stall level  1–120% Encoder stall detection 10-11 0.0–2.0 sec.  time 0: Warn and continue operation 10-12 Encoder stall action 1: Fault and ramp to stop ...
Page 309 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default FOC low-pass filter time 10-27 1–1000 ms  constant FOC gain for excitation 10-28 33–100% Tr  current rise time Top limit of frequency 10-29 0.00–100.00 Hz 20.00  deviation 10-30 Resolver pole pair...
Page 310 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 11 Advanced Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default bit 0: Auto-tuning for ASR bit 1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode) 11-00 System control bit 2: Zero servo bit 3: Dead time compensation closed bit 7: Save or do not save the frequency 11-01 Per unit of system inertia...
Page 311 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Flux weakening area 11-23 0–150%  speed response 11-24 APR gain 0.00–40.00 Hz (IM) / 0.00–100.00 Hz (PM) 10.00  Gain value for the APR 11-25 0–100  feed forward 11-26 APR curve time 0.00–655.35 sec.
Page 312 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Input from internal register 1: Input from external pulse Position Control 11-40 2: RS-485  Command Source 3: CANopen 5: Communication card 0: two-phase 11-41 PWM mode selection 2: Space vector 11-42 0000–FFFFh...
Page 313 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default bit9: Speed unit selection bit10: Speed unit selection bit11: Speed unit multiple Encoder at Load Side ppr 11-62 0–65535 Number (High Byte) Encoder at Load Side ppr 11-63 0–65535 2400 Number (Low Byte) 0.10–depending on the maximum setting value calculated...
Page 314 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 12 Tension Control Parameters Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Disabled 1: Closed-loop tension, speed mode 12-00 Tension control selection 2: Closed-loop linear speed, speed mode 3: Closed-loop tension, torque mode 4: Open-loop tension, torque mode 0: Rewind 12-01 Winding mode...
Page 315 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0: Disabled 1: Analog input Linear speed input 2: RS-485 communication input 12-19 command source 3: PG card pulse input 4: DFM-DCM pulse input 5: Pulse input through MI6 / MI7 terminal 12-20 Maximum linear speed 0.0–6500.0 m/min.
Page 316 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Reel diameter calculation 12-39 0.0–6553.5 sec.  delay time 12-40 Current reel diameter 1.0–6000.0 mm  Minimum output frequency 12-41 for reel diameter 0.00–599.00 Hz 1.00  calculation 0: Disabled Pre-startup mode 12-42 1: Pre-startup of rewind mode...
Page 317 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default Dynamic friction torque 12-60 0.0–100.0%  compensation Material inertia 12-61 0–30000  compensation coefficient Acceleration inertia 12-62 0.0–1000.0%  compensation gain Inertia compensation filter 12-63 0.00–100.00 5.00  time Deceleration inertia 12-64 0.0–1000.0%...
Page 318 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Setting Range Default bit 3: Reel diameter calculation by moving average method bit 5: PID output reverse limit selection bit 6: Material thickness range selection 11-59...
Page 319 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 13 Macro (User-defined) Parameter Name Setting Range Default 00: Disabled 01: User-defined parameter 02: Compressor 03: Fan 04: Pump 05: Conveyor 13-00 Application selection 06: Machine tool 07: Packing 08: Textiles 10: Logistics 11: Tension PID function 12: Tension PID and master / auxiliary frequency function 13-01 Application parameters...
Page 320 14 Protection Parameters (2) Parameter Name Default Setting Range 0: No function 1: Frequency command (in MH300 series, this function can be the torque limit Extension card input in torque control mode) 14-00  terminal selection (AI10) 2: Torque command (torque limit in speed mode)
Page 321 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Default Setting Range 6: Power factor 7: Power 8: Output torque 9: AVI 10: ACI 12: Iq current command 13: Iq feedback value 14: Id current command 15: Id feedback value 16: Vq-axis voltage command 17: Vd-axis voltage command 18: Torque command 19: PG2 frequency command...
Page 322 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Default Setting Range AI10 extension card Pr.14-18 = 0: 0.00–10.00 V 14-26 5.00  mid-point Pr.14-18 ≠ 0: 0.00–20.00 mA or 4–20 mA AI10 extension card 14-27 0.00–100.00% 50.00  proportional mid-point AI10 extension card Pr.14-18 = 0: 0.00–10.00 V 14-28...
Page 323 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Default Setting Range IGBT temperature at 14-57 -3276.7–3276.7ºC Read only malfunction 3 Output frequency at 14-58 0.00–599.00 Hz Read only malfunction 4 DC voltage at malfunction 14-59 0.0–6553.5 V Read only Output current at 14-60 0.00–655.35 Amps Read only...
Page 324 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Default Setting Range Over-torque detection 14-76 0.0–60.0 sec.  time (motor 3) 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed operation Over-torque detection 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed 14-77 ...
Page 325 Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 11-66...
Page 326 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter Settings 12-1 Descriptions of Parameter Settings 12-2 Adjustment & Applications 12.1-00-1...
Page 327 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-1 Descriptions of Parameter Settings 00 Drive Parameters You can set this parameter during operation. 00-00 AC Motor Drive Identity Code Default: Read only Settings Read only 00-01 AC Motor Drive Rated Current Display Default: Read only Settings Read only ...
Page 328 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 11: Reset all parameters to defaults with base frequency at 50 Hz) (keep the setting values of user-defined Pr.13-01–13-50) 12: Reset all parameters to defaults with base frequency at 60 Hz) (saves the setting value of user-defined Pr.13-01–13-50) ...
Page 329 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 18: Display the current multi-step speed (S) 19: Display corresponding CPU digital input pin status (d) 20: Display corresponding CPU digital output pin status (0.) 21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card) (P.) (The maximum value is 32 bits to display) 22: Pulse input frequency (S.) 23: Pulse input position (q.)
Page 330 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 Explanation 1  When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 1, 2, the displayed range for PG feedback is between 0–4000.  When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 3, 4, 5, the displayed range for PG feedback is between 0–1000.
Page 331 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 Explanation 7  Setting value 38: bit 0: The drive is running forward. bit 1: The drive is running backward. bit 2: The drive is ready. bit 3: Errors occurred on the drive. bit 4: The drive is running. bit 5: Warnings occurred on the drive.
Page 332 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  Entering the correct password in Pr.00-07 only temporarily deactivates the password. To permanently deactivate password protection, set Pr.00-08 to 0 manually. Otherwise, password protection is always reactivated after you reboot the motor drive. ...
Page 333 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  Determines the control mode of the AC motor drive: 0: IM V/F control: you can set the proportion of V/F as required and control multiple motors simultaneously. 1: IM V/F control + Encoder pulse input: you can use the encoder for closed-loop speed control. 2: IM sensorless vector control: get the optimal control by auto-tuning the motor parameters.
Page 334 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.00-10 = 0 and you set Pr.00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-9...
Page 335 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.00-10 = 0 and you set Pr.00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is as follows IM Space Vector Control (IMSVC) 12.1-00-10...
Page 336 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 PM Space Vector Control (PMSVC): 12.1-00-11...
Page 337 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.00-10 = 0, and you set Pr.00-11 to 3, the IM FOCPG control diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-12...
Page 338 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.00-10 = 0, and you set Pr.00-11 to 4, the PM FOCPG control diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-13...
Page 339 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.00-10 = 0, and you set Pr.00-11 to 5, IMFOC Sensorless control diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-14...
Page 340 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.00-10 = 0, and you set Pr.00-11 to 7, IPM FOC sensorless control diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-15...
Page 341 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-13 Torque Control Mode Default: 0 Settings 0: IM TQCPG (IM Torque control + encoder) 1: PM TQCPG (PM Torque control + encoder) 2: IMTQC sensorless (IM sensorless torque control)  See the following pages for more information. ...
Page 342 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  Pr.00-13 = 1, PM TQCPG control diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-17...
Page 343 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  Pr.00-13 = 2, IM TQC Sensorless control diagram is as follows: 12.1-00-18...
Page 344 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-16 Duty Selection Default: 1 Settings 0: Normal duty 1: Heavy duty  Normal duty: over-load rated output current 150% in 3 seconds (120%, 1 minute). Refer to Pr.00-17 for the setting for the carrier wave. Refer to Pr.00-01 or the specification table for the rated current.
Page 345 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-19 PLC Command Mask Default: Read only Settings bit 0: Control command controlled by PLC bit 1: Frequency command controlled by PLC bit 3: Torque command controlled by PLC  Determines if frequency command, control command or torque command is controlled by PLC. 00-20 Master Frequency Command Source (AUTO, REMOTE) ...
Page 346 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  In the HOA mode, if the multi-function input terminal (MI) function setting 41 and 42 are OFF, the drive does not receive any operation command and JOG is invalid. 00-22 Stop Method  Default: 0 Settings 0: Ramp to stop...
Page 347 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-25 User-Defined Characteristics  Default: 0 Settings bit 0–3: user-defined decimal places 0000h–0000b: no decimal place 0001h–0001b: one decimal place 0010h–0010b: two decimal places 0011h–0011b: three decimal places bit 4–15: user-defined unit 000xh: Hz 001xh: rpm 002xh: % 003xh: kg...
Page 348 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 022xh: m3/h 023xh: GPM 024xh: CFM xxxxh: Hz  bit 0–3: the control frequency F page, user-defined unit (Pr.00-04 = d10, PID feedback value) and the number of decimal places (Pr.00-26) which supports up to three decimal places. ...
Page 349 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-27 User-Defined Value Default: Read only Settings Read only  Pr.00-27 displays the user-defined value when Pr.00-26 is not set to 0. 00-29 LOCAL / REMOTE Mode Default: 0 Settings 0: Standard HOA function 1: Switch Local / Remote, the drive stops 2: Switch Local / Remote, the drive runs as the REMOTE setting for frequency and operation status...
Page 350 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  You can switch the HAND, LOCAL mode with the keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or the multi- function input terminal (MI) to set the master frequency source.  It returns to AUTO or REMOTE mode whenever you cycle the power. If you use a multi-function input terminal to switch between HAND (LOCAL) and AUTO (REMOTE) mode, the highest priority is the multi-function input terminal.
Page 351 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300  Once the RPWM function is enabled, particularly high frequency audio noise is reduced, and the audio frequency produced by the running motor also changes (usually from a higher to lower).  Three RPWM modes are provided for different applications. Each mode corresponds to different frequency distribution, electromagnetic noise distribution, and audio frequency.
Page 352 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-35 Auxiliary Frequency Source Default: 0 Settings 0: Master and auxiliary frequency function disabled 1: Inputs from digital keypad 2: Inputs from RS-485 communication 3: Inputs from analog input 4: Inputs from external UP / DOWN (multi-function input terminals) 5: Pulse inputs without direction command (refer to Pr.10-16) 6: CANopen communication card 8: Communication card...
Page 353 Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-48 Display Filter Time (Current)  Default: 0.100 Settings 0.001–65.535 sec.  Minimizes the current fluctuation displayed by digital keypad. 00-49 Display Filter Time (Keypad)  Default: 0.100 Settings 0.001–65.535 sec.  Minimizes the value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad. 00-50 Software Version (Date) Default: Read only...
Page 354 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01 Basic Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 01-00 Motor 1 Maximum Operation Frequency 01-52 Motor 2 Maximum Operation Frequency 01-53 Motor 3 Maximum Operation Frequency 01-62 Motor 4 Maximum Operation Frequency Default: 60.00 / 50.00 Settings 00.00–599.00 Hz...
Page 355 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01-37 Motor 2 Mid-point Frequency 1 Default: 3.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz 01-38 Motor 2 Mid-point Voltage 1  Default: 11.0 / 22.0 Settings 115V / 230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 01-56 Motor 3 Mid-point Frequency 1 Default: 3.00 Settings...
Page 356 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01-59 Motor 3 Mid-point Voltage 2  Default: 5.0 / 10.0 Settings 115V / 230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 01-67 Motor 4 Mid-point Frequency 2 Default: 1.50 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz 01-68 Motor 4 Mid-point Voltage 2 ...
Page 357 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubrication of the motor.  If the voltage is too high when the motor is at low frequencies, it may cause motor damage, overheating, and may trigger stalling or over-current protection. To prevent motor damage or motor fault, be careful when you set the voltage.
Page 358 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 (3) High starting torque 01-09 Start-up Frequency Default: 0.50 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  When the starting frequency is higher than the minimum output frequency, the drive’s output is from the starting frequency to the setting frequency. Refer to the following diagram for details. Fcmd = frequency command;...
Page 359 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Fcmd > Fmin and Fcmd < Fstart: If Flow < Fcmd, drive runs directly by Fcmd. If Flow ≥ Fcmd, drive runs by Fcmd, then rises to Flow according to acceleration time. ...
Page 360 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01-12 Acceleration Time 1  01-13 Deceleration Time 1  01-14 Acceleration Time 2  01-15 Deceleration Time 2  01-16 Acceleration Time 3  01-17 Deceleration Time 3  01-18 Acceleration Time 4 ...
Page 361 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01-22 JOG Frequency  Default: 6.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  You can use both the external terminal JOG and F1 key on the optional keypad KPC-CC01 to set the JOG function. When the JOG command is ON, the AC motor drive accelerates from 0 Hz to the JOG frequency (Pr.01-22).
Page 362 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Sets a slow start when the drive begins to accelerate at the start. The acceleration and deceleration curve adjust the S-curve acceleration and deceleration according to the parameter value. When you enable this function, the drive has a different acceleration and deceleration curve based on the acceleration and deceleration time.
Page 363 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01-34 Zero-speed Mode Default: 0 Settings 0: Output waiting 1: Zero-speed operation 2: Fmin (refer to Pr.01-07, 01-41)  When the frequency command of drive is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41), the drive operates using this parameter.
Page 364 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01-43 V/F Curve Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: V/F curve determined by Pr.01-00–01-08 1: V/F curve to the power of 1.5 2: V/F curve to the power of 2 16: V/F Separated mode (VFSM) ...
Page 365 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  3 (auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration): the drive auto-detects the load torque and accelerates from the fastest acceleration time and smoothest start current to the setting frequency. When decelerating, the drive auto-detects the load re-generation and stops the motor smoothly with the fastest deceleration time.
Page 366 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  1: during deceleration, the drive controls the motor according to the setting of Pr.06-01 and the voltage recovery rate of the DC bus. The controller starts when the DC bus voltage reaches 95% of Pr.06-01.
Page 367 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 01-77 The deceleration time of VFSM over-current stall prevention Default: 0 Settings 1.00–600.00  Set this time < (frequency rise or fall time (Pr.01-12, 01-13) × 100 / speed gain / voltage level %), the half-separation speed limit time will not affect the original V/F graph 12.1-01-14...
Page 368 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 02 Digital Input / Output Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 02-00 Two-wire / Three-wire Operation Control Default: 1 Settings 0: No function 1: Two-wire mode 1, power on for operation control (M1: FWD / STOP, M2: REV / STOP) 2: Two-wire mode 2, power on for operation control (M1: RUN / STOP, M2: FWD / REV)
Page 369 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Pr.02-00 External terminal control circuits Setting value: 5 Two-wire Quick Start Setting value: 6 Three-wire Quick Start 02-01 Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1) 02-02 Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2) 02-07 Multi-function Input Command 7 (MI7) Default: 0 02-03 Multi-function Input Command 3 (MI3)
Page 370 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12: Output stops 13: Cancel the setting for auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration time 15: Rotating speed command from AVI 16: Rotating speed command from ACI 18: Forced to stop (Pr.07-20) 19: Frequency up command 20: Frequency down command 21: PID function disabled 22: Clear the counter 23: Input the counter value (MI6)
Page 371 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 74: Reverse PID feedback 78: Multi-step position confirmation 79: Position / speed mode switching (0: Speed mode, 1: Position mode) 80: Location command source switching (increase) (0: Internal register, 1: External pulse input) 83: Multi-motors (IM) selection bit 0 84: Multi-motors (IM) selection bit 1 86: Enable initial reel diameter 87: Initial reel diameter 1...
Page 372 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions Reset Use this terminal to reset the drive after clearing a drive fault. This function is valid when the source of the operation command is the external terminals. The JOG operation executes when the drive stops completely. While running, you can still change the operation direction, and the STOP key on the keypad* and the STOP command from communications are valid.
Page 373 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions For external fault input. The drive decelerates according to the External Fault (EF) Pr.07-20 setting, and the keypad shows “EF” (it shows the fault input (Pr.07-20) record when an external fault occurs). The drive keeps running until the fault is cleared (terminal status restored) after RESET.
Page 374 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions This function is valid when the source of the operation command is external terminal. ON: the drive executes forward JOG. When FWD JOG command executing the JOG command in torque mode, the drive automatically switches to speed mode.
Page 375 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions High torque bias Middle torque bias Refer to Pr.11-30–11-32 for details. Low torque bias ON: the AC motor drive executes internal single-point position control according to the setting for Pr.10-19. This function is valid in FOCPG mode only.
Page 376 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions Torque command For torque control (Pr.00-10=2), when the torque command is AVI direction or ACI, ON: negative torque. Force coasting to stop ON: during operation, the drive free runs to stop. 1.
Page 377 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it changes Trigger CANopen to Quick Stop. Refer to Chapter 15 CANopen Overview for more Quick Stop details. Use Pr.00-29 to select LOCAL / REMOTE mode (refer to Pr.00- 29).
Page 378 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions 1. W hen the drive starts, the multi-step position commands (MIx = 1–4) are simply to switch between multiple positions, which does not make the motor run. set and activate the multi- function input terminal MI=88 (multi-step position command confirmation) to make the motor move to the corresponding point-to-point position,...
Page 379 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions ON: parameters can be changed Multi-motors (IM) Example: MI1 = 83, MI2 = 84 selection bit 0 Related Motor Parameter Motor Max. Operation V/F Curve Selection Frequency Parameter Motor 1 Pr.01-00 Pr.01-01–01-08 Multi-motors (IM) Motor 2...
Page 380 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.02-09 is set to 0: the increasing or decreasing frequency command (F) operates according to the setting for acceleration or deceleration time (refer to Pr.01-12–01-19).  When Pr.02-09 is set to 1: the increasing / decreasing frequency command (F) operates according to the setting of Pr.02-10 (0.01–1.00 Hz/ms).
Page 381 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.02-09 is set to 3: the increasing / decreasing frequency command (F) operates according to the exponential curve.  When Pr.02-09 is set to 4: the increasing / decreasing frequency command (F) operates according to the setting of Pr.02-10 per every 100 ms.
Page 382 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  This parameter sets the status of the multi-function input signal (0: normally open; 1: normally closed) and it is not affected by the status of SINK / SOURCE.  bit 0–bit 6 correspond to MI1–MI7. ...
Page 383 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 19: External interrupt B.B. input Base Block) 20: Warning output 21: Over-voltage 22: Over-current stall prevention 23: Over-voltage stall prevention 24: Operation source 25: Forward command 26: Reverse command 29: Output when frequency Pr.02-34 ≥...
Page 384 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions No Function Output terminal with no function Indication during RUN Activates when the drive is not in STOP. Operation speed Activates when output frequency of the drive reaches the reached setting frequency. Desired frequency Activates when the desired frequency (Pr.02-22) is reached.
Page 385 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions External interrupt B.B. Activates when external interrupt (B.B.) stop output occurs in input (Base Block) the drive. Warning output Activates when a warning is detected. Over-voltage Activates when over-voltage is detected. Over-current stall Activates when over-current stall prevention is detected.
Page 386 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions Use this function with Pr.02-34 and Pr.02-58. Crane function Refer to Pr.02-34 and Pr.02-58 for details. Motor actual speed Active when the actual motor speed is less than Pr.02-47. detection Low current output Use this function with Pr.06-71–Pr.06-73.
Page 387 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions Control the output through communication cards (CMM-PD02, CMM-EIP02, CMM-EC02, CMM-DN02) Physical Setting for related Corresponding Output control for Attribute terminal parameters Address communication cards Pr.02-13 = 51 bit 0 of 2640 Pr.02-16 = 51 bit 3 of 2640 Pr.02-17 = 51...
Page 388 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 02-18 Multi-function Output Direction  Default: 0000h Settings 0000h–FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.)  This parameter is in hexadecimal.  This parameter is set by a bit. If the bit is 1, the corresponding multi-function output acts in an opposite way.
Page 389 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 02-21 Digital Output Gain (DFM)  Default: 1 Settings 1–55  Sets the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and the digital frequency output (pulse, work period = 50 %). The output pulse per second = output frequency x Pr.02-21. 02-22 Desired Frequency Reached 1 ...
Page 390 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 02-34 Output Frequency Setting for Multi-function Output Terminal  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz 02-58 Multi-function Output Terminal : Brake Frequency Check Point (Function 42)  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  Use Pr.02-34 with Pr.02-58 for the crane function and select the crane function MO #42 to set the multi-function outputs Pr.02-13, Pr.02-16, and Pr.02-17.
Page 391 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 02-47 Motor Zero-speed Level  Default: 0 Settings 0–65535 rpm  If Pr.01-11 is set as “no PG feedback” control mode, it calculates by estimated rotating speed. If Pr.01-11 is set as “PG feedback” control mode, it calculates by the actual feedback speed, which means that motor needs to install encoder to feedback the actual rotating speed and use with PG card or MI pulse input terminal.
Page 392 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Example: When Pr.02-50 displays 0034h (hex) (that is, the value is 52 (decimal) and 0110100 (binary)), it means that MI3, MI5 and MI6 are ON. 02-51 Display the Status of the Multi-function Output Terminal Default: Read only Settings Monitor the status of the Multi-function Output Terminal...
Page 393 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Example: When Pr.02-52 displays 0034h (hex) (that is, the value is 52 (decimal) and 0110100 (binary)), it means that MI3, MI5 and MI6 are used by PLC. 02-53 Display the External Multi-function Output Terminals Used by the PLC Default: Read only Settings Monitor the status of PLC output terminals...
Page 394 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 02-70 IO Card Types Default: Read only Settings Read only 1: EMC-BPS01 (backup power supply) 10: EMM-D33A 11: EMM-A22A 12: EMM-R2CA 13: EMM-R3AA 02-74 Internal / External Multi-function Input Terminal Selection Default: 0000h Settings 0000–FFFFh ...
Page 395 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Pr.02-74 and Pr.02-75 can both be changed during RUN.  Pr.02-74 and Pr.02-75 are saved after powering off.  You can choose N.O. (Pr.02-12 bit = 0) or N.C. (Pr.02-12 bit = 1) through the Pr.02-12 MI mode to trigger the virtual terminals.
Page 396 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 03 Analog Input / Output Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 03-00 AVI Analog Input Selection  Default: 1 03-01 ACI Analog Input Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Frequency command 2: Torque command (torque limit in speed mode) 3: Torque compensation command...
Page 397 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When the settings for Pr.03-00 and Pr.03-01 are the same, the AVI input is selected first. 03-03 AVI Analog Input Bias  Default: 0.0 Settings -100.0–100.0%  Sets the corresponding AVI voltage for the external analog input 0. 03-04 ACI Analog Input Bias ...
Page 398 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Use this parameter only for AVI or ACI analog input.  Requirements for negative frequency (reverse running) 1. Pr.03-10 = 1 2. Bias mode = Bias serves as the center 3. Corresponded analog input gain < 0 (negative); this makes the input frequency negative. In using the additional analog input function (Pr.03-18 = 1), when the analog signal is negative after the addition, you can set this parameter to allow or not allow the reverse direction.
Page 399 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 03 Diagram 04 Diagram 05 12.1-03-4...
Page 400 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 06 Diagram 07 Diagram 08 12.1-03-5...
Page 401 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 09 Diagram 10 Diagram 11 12.1-03-6...
Page 402 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 12 Diagram 13 Diagram 14 12.1-03-7...
Page 403 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 15 Diagram 16 Diagram 17 12.1-03-8...
Page 404 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 18 Diagram 19 Diagram 20 12.1-03-9...
Page 405 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 21 Diagram 22 Diagram 23 12.1-03-10...
Page 406 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 24 Diagram 25 Diagram 26 12.1-03-11...
Page 407 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 27 Diagram 28 12.1-03-12...
Page 408 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 29 Diagram 30 12.1-03-13...
Page 409 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 31 Diagram 32 03-11 AVI Analog Input Gain  03-12 ACI Analog Input Gain  Default: 100.0 Settings -500.0–500.0%  Use Pr.03-03–03-12 when the Frequency command source is the analog voltage or current signal. 12.1-03-14...
Page 410 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 03-15 AVI Analog Input Filter Time  03-16 ACI Analog Input Filter Time  Default: 0.01 Settings 0.00–20.00 sec.  Use these input delays to filter a noisy analog signal.  When the time constant setting is too large, the control is stable but the control response is slow.
Page 411 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 03-20 AFM Multi-function Output  Default: 0 Settings 0–23 Function Chart Settings Functions Descriptions Output frequency (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%. Frequency command (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%. Motor speed (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
Page 412 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions Pr.03-32 controls the voltage output level. Constant voltage output 0–100% of Pr.03-32 corresponds to 0–10 V of AFM. 03-21 AFM Analog Output Gain  Default: 100.0 Settings 0.0–500.0%  Adjusts the voltage level outputted to the analog meter from the analog signal (Pr.03-20) output terminal AFM of the drive.
Page 413 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 03-29 ACI Terminal Input Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: 4–20 mA 1: 0–10 V 2: 0–20 mA  When you change the input mode, verify that the external terminal switch position (ACI) is correct.
Page 414 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 03-35 AFM Output Filter Time  Default: 0.01 Settings 0.00–20.00 sec. 03-39 VR Input Selection  Default: 1 Settings 0: Disable 1: Frequency command  VR is the abbreviation for Variable Resistor; it is the potentiometer of the keyboard panel KPMH-LC01.
Page 415 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 03-59 ACI Mid-point  Default: 12.00 Settings Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 mA Pr.03-29 ≠ 1, 0.00–20.00 mA 03-60 ACI Proportional Mid-point  Default: 50.00 Settings 0.00–100.00% 03-61 ACI Highest Point  Default: 20.00 Settings Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 mA Pr.03-29 ≠...
Page 416 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 03-67 AVI Voltage Highest Point  Default: 10.00 Settings 0.00–10.00 V 03-68 AVI Proportional Highest Point  Default: 100.00 Settings -100.00–100.00%  When you set the positive voltage AVI to the Frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00 Maximum Operation Frequency) and the motor runs in the forward direction.
Page 417 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Pr.03-69–Pr.03-74 are valid when Pr.03-28 sets as -10–10 V.  When you set the negative voltage AVI to the Frequency command, -100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00 Maximum Operation Frequency) and the motor runs in the reverse direction. ...
Page 418 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 04-00 Step Speed Frequency  04-01 Step Speed Frequency  04-02 Step Speed Frequency  04-03 Step Speed Frequency  04-04 Step Speed Frequency ...
Page 419 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 04-50 PLC Buffer 0  04-51 PLC Buffer 1  04-52 PLC Buffer 2  04-53 PLC Buffer 3  04-54 PLC Buffer 4  04-55 PLC Buffer 5  04-56 PLC Buffer 6 ...
Page 420 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 05 Motor Parameters In this parameter group, the following are abbreviations for different types of motors: IM: Induction motor  PM: Permanent magnet synchronous AC motor  IPM: Interior permanent magnet synchronous AC motor ...
Page 421 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 05-05 No-load Current for Induction Motor 1 (A) Default: Depending on the model power Settings 0.00–Pr.05-01 default  The default is 40% of the motor’s rated current. 05-06 Stator Resistance (Rs) for Induction Motor 1 Default: Depending on the model power Settings...
Page 422 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 05-16 Number of Poles for Induction Motor 2 Default: 4 Settings 2–20  Sets the number of poles for the motor (must be an even number).  Set up Pr.01-35 and Pr.05-15 before setting up Pr.05-04 to make sure the motor operates normally. 05-17 No-load Current for Induction Motor 2 (A) Default: Depending on the...
Page 423 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 05-24 Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for an Induction Motor Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Enable 05-25 Delay Time for Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for an Induction Motor  Default: 0.200 Settings 0.000–60.000 sec. ...
Page 424 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 05-26 Accumulated Watt-second for a Motor in Low Word (W-sec.) 05-27 Accumulated Watt-second for a Motor in High Word (W-sec.) 05-28 Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor (W-hour) 05-29 Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in Low Word (kW-hour) 05-30 Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in High Word (kW-hour) Default: 0.0...
Page 425 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Induction Motor (IM) or Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor (PM) 05-33 Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: Induction Motor 1: SPM 2: IPM 05-34 Full-load Current for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor Default: Depending on the model power Settings 0–120% of the drive’s rated current...
Page 426 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 05-64 Full-load Current for Induction Motor 3 (A) Default: Depending on the model power Settings 10–120% of the drive’s rated current Set this value according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. ...
Page 427 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 05-70 Full-load Current for Induction Motor 4 (A) Default: Depending on the model power Settings 10–120% of the drive’s rated current  Set this value according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. The default is 90% of the drive’s rated current.
Page 428 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06 Protection Parameters (1)  You can set this parameter during operation. 06-00 Low Voltage Level  Default: 180.0 / 360.0 Settings 115V / 230V models: 150.0–220.0 V 460V models: 300.0–440.0 V  Sets the Low Voltage (Lv) level. When the DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00, the drive stops output and the motor free runs to a stop.
Page 429 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Related parameters: Pr.01-13, Pr.01-15, Pr.01-17, Pr.01-19 Deceleration Time 1–4  Pr.02-13 Multi-function Output 1 (Relay 1)  Pr.02-16–Pr.02-17 Multi-function Output 2–3 (MO1, 2)  Pr.06-02 Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention  06-02 Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention ...
Page 430 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Pr.02-16–Pr.02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2) Pr.06-01 Over-voltage stall prevention Pr.06-03 Over-current stall prevention during acceleration Pr.06-04 Over-current stall prevention during operation Pr.06-05 Acceleration / deceleration time selection for stall prevention at constant speed Traditional over-voltage stall prevention ...
Page 431 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Smart over-voltage stall prevention  Adopts closed-loop control and takes the setting for Pr.06-01 over-voltage stall prevention as target command during acceleration, deceleration and constant speed. When the DC bus voltage is higher than the stall prevention level, the controller increases the output frequency gradually according to closed-loop response until the DC bus voltage drops below the stall prevention level, and returns to target frequency based on the previous setting for deceleration time when the DC bus voltage is lower than the stall prevention level.
Page 432 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-03 Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration  Default: 120 / 180 Settings Normal duty: 0–150% (100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive) Heavy duty: 0–200% (100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive) ...
Page 433 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When you enable the over-current stall prevention, the drive’s acceleration time is longer than the setting.  When the over-current stall prevention occurs because the motor capacity is too small or operates in the default, decrease the Pr.06-03 setting value. ...
Page 434 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Acceleration / Deceleration Time Selection for Stall Prevention at Constant 06-05  Speed Default: 0 Settings 0: By current acceleration / deceleration time 1: By the 1 acceleration / deceleration time 2: By the 2 acceleration / deceleration time 3: By the 3 acceleration / deceleration time...
Page 435 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-11 Over-torque Detection Time (Motor 2)  Default: 0.1 Settings 0.1–60.0 sec.  When the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr.06-07 or Pr.06-10) and also exceeds the over-torque detection time (Pr.06-08 or Pr.06-11), the over-torque detection follows the setting of Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09.
Page 436 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-13 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection 1 (Motor 1)  06-27 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection 2 (Motor 2)  Default: 2 Settings 0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling) 1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft) 2: Disable ...
Page 437 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 2. Pr.06-13 or Pr.06-27 set to 1 (using standard motor): When the output current of the drive is higher than 150% of the motor rated current (refer to the motor cooling curve with shaft-fixed fan), the drive starts to count the time. The electronic thermal relay acts when the accumulated time exceeds Pr.06-14 or Pr.06-28.
Page 438 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-17 Fault Record 1 06-18 Fault Record 2 06-19 Fault Record 3 06-20 Fault Record 4 06-21 Fault Record 5 06-22 Fault Record 6 Default: 0 Display 0: No fault record 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 3: Over-current during steady operation (ocn) 4: Ground fault (GFF)
Page 439 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 40: Auto-tuning error (AUE) 41: PID loss ACI (AFE) 42: PG feedback error (PGF1) 43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) 44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) 45: PG slip error (PGF4) 48: ACI loss (ACE) 49: External fault (EF) 50: Emergency stop (EF1) 51: External base block (bb) 52: Enter wrong password three times and locked (Pcod)
Page 440 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 126: Internal communication error (CP32) 127: Firmware version error (CP33) 128: Over-torque 3 (ot3) 129: Over-torque 4 (ot4) 134: Electronic thermal relay 3 protection (EoL3) 135: Electronic thermal relay 4 protection (EoL4) 140: oc hardware error (Hd6) 141: GFF occurs before run (b4GFF) 142: Auto-tuning error 1 (DC test stage) (AUE1) 143: Auto-tuning error 2 (High frequency test stage) (AUE2)
Page 441 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 Fault Code current Volt. 14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS) ● 15: Phase loss protection (orP) ● 16: IGBT overheating (oH1) ●...
Page 442 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 Fault Code current Volt. 78: STO loss 3 (STL3) ● 79: U-phase over-current before run (Aoc) ● 80: V-phase over-current before run (boc) ●...
Page 443 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-30 PTC Level  Default: 50.0 Settings 0.0–100.0%  Sets AVI / ACI analog input function Pr.03-00–03-01 to 6 [Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistor input value].  Use this to set the PTC level; the corresponding value for 100% is the analog input maximum value.
Page 444 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-31 Frequency Command for Malfunction Default: Read only Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  When a malfunction occurs, check the current Frequency command. If it happens again, it overwrites the previous record. 06-32 Output Frequency at Malfunction Default: Read only Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz...
Page 445 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-39 Torque Command at Malfunction Default: Read only Settings -32767–32767%  When a malfunction occurs, check the current torque command. If it happens again, it overwrites the previous record. 06-40 Status of the Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction Default: Read only Settings 0000h–FFFFh...
Page 446 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-47 Current Detection Level for Output Phase Loss  Default: 1.00 Settings 0.00–100.00% 06-48 DC Brake Time for Output Phase Loss  Default: 0.000 Settings 0.000–65.535 sec.  Setting Pr.06-48 to 0 disables the OPHL detection function. ...
Page 447 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Status 3: The drive is in STOP; Pr.06-48 ≠ 0; Pr.07-02 ≠ 0  When the drive starts, it executes Pr.06-48 first, and then executes Pr.07-02 (DC brake). The DC brake current level in this state includes two parts: one is 20 times the Pr.06-47 setting value in Pr.06-48 setting time;...
Page 448 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Status 4: The drive is in STOP; Pr.06-48 ≠ 0; Pr.07-02 = 0 When the drive starts, it executes Pr.06-48 as the DC brake. The DC brake current level is 20 times the Pr.06-47 setting value. Status 4-1: Pr.06-48 ≠...
Page 449 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 06-53 Treatment for Phase Loss Protection (OrP)  Default: 0 Settings 0: Fault and ramp to stop 1: Fault and coast to stop  The drive executes the input phase loss protection according to Pr.06-53. 06-55 Derating Protection ...
Page 450 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 corresponds to 75% of the derating ratio. When the output current is higher than the value, the carrier frequency will not be reduced by this, but if the overload continues for a long time, the oH1 fault (IGBT overheating) or oL fault (the inverter is overloaded) will be triggered due to the IGBT temperature rise, and the motor will eventually stop.
Page 451 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 1. Use voltage type analog input (AVI, ACI voltage 0–10 V) and select PT100 mode. 2. Select one of the voltage type analog inputs below: (a) Pr.03-00 =11 (b) Pr.03-01 = 11 and Pr.03-29 = 1 3.
Page 452 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 4. Refer to the RTD temperature and resistance comparison table Temperature = 135°C, resistance = 151.71 Ω, input current: 9 mA, voltage: about 1.37 V Temperature = 150°C, resistance = 157.33 Ω, input current: 9 mA, voltage: about 1.42 V 5.
Page 453 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 The fifth error: ocd occurs after another 1000 minutes. The sixth error: ocn occurs after another 1000 minutes. Then Pr.06-17–06-22 and Pr.06-63–06-70 are recorded as follows: fault fault fault fault fault fault Pr.06-17 Pr.06-18 Pr.06-19 Pr.06-20 Pr.06-21...
Page 454 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07 Special Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 07-00 Software brake chopper action level  Default: 370.0 / 740.0 Settings 115V / 230V models: 350.0–450.0 V 460V models: 700.0–900.0 V  Sets the brake transistor level for the DC bus voltage. Choose a suitable brake resistor to achieve the best deceleration.
Page 455 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-04 DC Brake Frequency at STOP  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  This parameter determines the start frequency of the DC brake before the drive ramps to stop. When this setting is less than Pr.01-09 (Start-up Frequency), the start frequency of the DC brake starts from the minimum frequency.
Page 456 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  In PG control mode, the AC motor drive executes the speed tracking function automatically according to the PG speed when this setting is NOT set to 0. 07-07 Allowed Power Loss Duration  Default: 2.0 Settings 0.0–20.0 sec.
Page 457 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12.1-07-4...
Page 458 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-09 Current Limit of Speed Tracking  Default: 100 Settings 20–200%  The AC motor drive executes speed tracking only if the output current is greater than the value set in Pr.07-09.  The maximum current for speed tracking affects the synchronous time. The larger the parameter setting is, the faster the synchronization occurs.
Page 459 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-12 Speed Tracking during Start-up  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Speed tracking by maximum output frequency 2: Speed tracking by motor frequency at start 3: Speed tracking by minimum output frequency  Speed tracking is suitable for punch, fans and other large inertia loads. For example, a mechanical punch usually has a large inertia flywheel, and the general stop method is coast to stop.
Page 460 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  The following explains the dEb action: When the DC voltage drops below the dEb setting level, the dEb function starts to work (soft start relay remains closed), and the drive executes auto-deceleration. Situation 1: Momentary power loss, or power current too low and unstable, or power supply sliding ...
Page 461 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Situation 3: Power supply unexpected shut down or power loss.  Pr.07-13=1 “dEb active, DC bus voltage returns, the output frequency does not return” and the power does not recover. The keypad displays the “dEb” warning and stops after decelerating to the lowest running frequency.
Page 462 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-15 Dwell Time at Acceleration  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–600.00 sec. 07-17 Dwell Time at Deceleration  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–600.00 sec. 07-16 Dwell Frequency at Acceleration  Default: 0.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz 07-18 Dwell Frequency at Deceleration ...
Page 463 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-20 Emergency stop (EF) & force to stop selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: Coast to stop 1: Stop by the 1 deceleration time 2: Stop by the 2 deceleration time 3: Stop by the 3 deceleration time 4: Stop by the 4 deceleration time...
Page 464 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-21 Automatic Energy-saving Setting  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Enable  When energy-saving is enabled, the motor acceleration operates with full voltage. During constant speed operation, it automatically calculates the best voltage value according to the load power. This function is not suitable for fluctuating loads or loads which are nearly full during operation.
Page 465 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  2: The drive disables the AVR function when decelerating to stop, and may accelerate to brake.  When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is shorter when setting this parameter to 2 with auto-acceleration and deceleration, and the deceleration is quicker and more stable.
Page 466 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-27 Slip Compensation Gain  07-72 Slip Compensation Gain (Motor 2)  07-74 Slip Compensation Gain (Motor 3)  07-76 Slip Compensation Gain (Motor 4)  Default: 0.00 (Default value is 1 in SVC mode) Settings 0.00–10.00 ...
Page 467 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 07-32 Motor Shock Compensation Factor  Default: 1000 Settings 0–10000  If there are current wave motions in the motor in some specific area, setting this parameter can effectively improve this situation.  When the current wave motion occurs in low frequency and high-power, increase the value for Pr.07-32.
Page 468 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 08 High-function PID Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 08-00 Terminal Selection of PID Feedback  Default: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr.03-00) 2: Negative PID feedback: by single-phase pulse input (MI7), without direction (Pr.10-16) 3: Negative PID feedback: by single -phase pulse input (MI7), with direction (Pr.10-16)
Page 469 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12.1-08-2...
Page 470 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 00-20 Master Frequency Command Source (AUTO, REMOTE)  Default: 0 Settings 0: Inputs from digital keypad 1: Inputs from RS-485 communication 2: Inputs from external analog (refer to Pr.03-00, Pr.03-01) 3: Inputs from external UP / DOWN terminals (multi-function input terminals) 4: Pulse inputs without direction command (refer to Pr.10-16 without direction) 5: Pulse inputs with direction command (refer to Pr.10-16)
Page 471 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 3. Concept of PID control:  Proportional gain (P): The output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there is always a steady-state error.  Integral time (I): The controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the steady-state error, add an “integral part”...
Page 472 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Pr.00-04 = 10 (display PID feedback (b) (%))  Pr.01-12 Acceleration Time is set according to actual conditions.  Pr.01-13 Deceleration Time is set according to actual conditions.  Pr.00-21 = 0 to operate through the digital keypad ...
Page 473 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 however, the differential operation increases noise interference. Note that a too large differential causes more noise interference. In addition, the differential shows the change and the differential output is 0 when there is no change. Note that you cannot use the differential control independently.
Page 474 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Pr.08-07 determines the primary low pass filter time when in PID control. Setting a large time constant may slow down the drive’s response rate.  PID control output frequency is filtered with a primary low pass function. This function can filter a mix of frequencies.
Page 475 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parallel connection 08-08 Feedback Signal Detection Time  Default: 0.0 Settings 0.0–3600.0 sec.  Pr.08-08 is valid only for ACI 4–20 mA.  This parameter sets the detection time for abnormal PID signal feedback. Setting the detection time to 0.0 disables the detection function.
Page 476 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.08-18 = 0, the unit for Pr.08-10 and that for Pr.08-11 switch to frequency. The settings are between 0–599.00 Hz.  When Pr.08-18 = 1, the unit for Pr.08-10 and that for Pr.08-11 switch to percentage. The settings then are between 0–200.00%.
Page 477 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 08-18 Sleep Mode Function Setting Default: 0 Settings 0: Refer to PID output command 1: Refer to PID feedback signal  0: The unit for Pr.08-10 and that for Pr.08-11 switch to frequency. The settings then are between 0.00–599.00 Hz.
Page 478 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 2) Frequency Command Calculation of the Internal PID (Use PID, Pr.08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr.08-18 = 0) When the PID calculation Frequency command reaches the sleep frequency, the drive starts to count the sleep time and the output frequency starts to decrease. If the drive exceeds the preset sleep time, then the drive is in sleep mode (0Hz).
Page 479 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 When the PID feedback value reaches the wake-up percentage, the drive starts to count the wake-up delay time. Once it reaches the wake-up delay time, the drive starts to catch up to reach the PID Frequency command value by the acceleration time. Example 01: PID negative feedback Pr.08-10 must >...
Page 480 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Example 02: PID positive feedback Pr.08-10 must < Pr.08-11  Area 30kg is the reference  Physical quantity Set the parameter:  > 36 kg, the drive Pr.03-00 = 5 (AVI is PID feedback) Sleep area goes into sleep, the Pr.08-00 = 4 (PID positive feedback: AVI...
Page 481 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Not equal to 0.00 seconds: Enables the PID acceleration / deceleration command. For PID acceleration and deceleration, when the PID target value changes, the command value increment / decrement is executed according to this parameter. 08-29 Frequency Base Corresponding to 100.00% PID Default: 0.00...
Page 482 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.08-65 ≠ 0, the internal calculation of Proportional gain will be reduced by 100 times, that is, when Pr.01-00 Fmax = 60Hz, error = 100%, Pr.08-01 = 1.00, the output frequency is Pr.01-00 Fmax ‟0.01”...
Page 483 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 08-67 Master and Auxiliary Reverse Running Cutoff Frequency  Default: 10.0 Settings 0.0–100.0%  100% corresponds to Pr.01-00 the Maximum operation frequency  In some cases, it is only possible for the PID to control the value setting and the feedback in the same situation when the PID output frequency is negative (the motor is reversed).
Page 484 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 When the PID deviation is smaller than Pr.08-70, it switches to the normal PID control (the smart start-up frequency is filled into the PID integral when switching to PID control to avoid discontinuous frequency). 08-75 PID2 Parameter Switch Condition ...
Page 485 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Switch according to the deviation:  When the deviation absolute value between the set point and feedback is smaller than Pr.08-76 (PID2 Parameter Switch Deviation 1), the first group PID parameters are used.  When the deviation absolute value between the set point and feedback is larger than Pr.08- 77 (PID2 Parameter Switch Deviation 2), the second group PID parameters are used.
Page 486 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  As shown in the figure, the breaking section is set at the lower level. When WireBreak starting, the pendulum is at the lower level that the winding condition is not established. When the pendulum is greater than the command value, the WireBreak condition is established.
Page 487 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 12.1-08-20...
Page 488 When using the communication interface, the diagram on the right shows the communication port pin definitions. We recommend that you connect the AC motor drive to your PC by using Delta IFD6530 or IFD6500 as a communication converter.  You can set this parameter during operation.
Page 489 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 09-04 COM1 Communication Protocol  Default: 1 Settings 1: 7, N, 2 (ASCII) 2: 7, E, 1 (ASCII) 3: 7, O, 1 (ASCII) 4: 7, E, 2 (ASCII) 5: 7, O, 2 (ASCII) 6: 8, N, 1 (ASCII) 7: 8, N, 2 (ASCII) 8: 8, E, 1 (ASCII) 9: 8, O, 1 (ASCII)
Page 490 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 09-11 Block Transfer 1  09-12 Block Transfer 2  09-13 Block Transfer 3  09-14 Block Transfer 4  09-15 Block Transfer 5  09-16 Block Transfer 6  09-17 Block Transfer 7 ...
Page 491 Default: 2 Settings 1–254 09-36 CANopen Slave Address Default: 2 Settings 0: Disable 1–127 09-37 CANopen Speed Default: 0 Settings 0: 1 Mbps 1: 500 kbps 2: 250 kbps 3: 125 kbps 4: 100 kbps (Delta only) 5: 50 kbps 12.1-09-4...
Page 492 5: CANopen hardware disconnection warning (Can Bus OFF) bit 6: Error protocol for CANopen 09-40 CANopen Decoding Method Default: 1 Settings 0: Use Delta-defined decoding method 1: Use CANopen Standard DS402 protocol 09-41 CANopen Communication Status Default: Read Only Settings...
Page 493  Default: 2 Settings Standard DeviceNet: 0: 125 Kbps 1: 250 Kbps 2: 500 Kbps 3: 1 Mbps (Delta Only) Non-standard DeviceNet (Delta only) : 0: 10 Kbps 1: 20 Kbps 2: 50 Kbps 3: 100 Kbps 4: 125 Kbps...
Page 494 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 09-72 Other DeviceNet Speed Settings (for DeviceNet)  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable: In this mode, baud rate must be 125 Kbps, 250 Kbps, 500 Kbps, or 1 Mbps in the standard DeviceNet speed. 1: Enable: In this mode, DeviceNet baud rate must be same as that for CANopen baud rate (0–8).
Page 495 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 09-88 Communication Card Password (low word) (for EtherNet)  09-89 Communication Card Password (high word) (for EtherNet)  Default: 0 Settings 0–99 09-90 Reset Communication Card (for EtherNet)  Default: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Reset, return to default 09-91 (for EtherNet)
Page 496 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 10-00 Encoder Type Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: Disabled 1: ABZ 3: Resolver 1x PM encoder 5. Pulse input (MI7)  When you use the MI7 single-phase pulse input function, you must use it with Pr.00-20 = 4, Pr.10-00 = 5 and Pr.10-16 = 5 ...
Page 497 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 2: Phases A and B are pulse inputs, forward direction if B-phase leads A- phase by 90 degrees 3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input (low input = reverse direction, high input = forward direction).
Page 498 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 10-04 Electrical Gear at Load Side A1  10-05 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1  10-06 Electrical Gear at Load Side A2  10-07 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2  Default: 100 Settings 1–65535 ...
Page 499 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 10-10 Encoder Stall Level  Default: 115 Settings 0–120% (0: No function)  This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs. The maximum operation frequency for Pr.01-00 = 100% 10-11 Encoder Stall Detection Time ...
Page 500 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 2: Phases A and B are pulse inputs, forward direction if B-phase leads A- phase by 90 degrees 3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input (low input = reverse direction, high input = forward direction).
Page 501 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 10-17 Electrical Gear A  10-18 Electrical Gear B  Default: 100 Settings 1–65535  Rotation speed = pulse frequency / encoder pulses (Pr.10-01) * Electrical Gear A / Electrical Gear 10-19 Positioning for Encoder Position ...
Page 502 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 10-25 FOC Bandwidth for Speed Observer  Default: 40.0 Settings 20.0–100.0 Hz.  Setting the speed observer to a higher bandwidth could shorten the speed response time but creates greater noise interference during the speed observation. 10-26 FOC Minimum Stator Frequency ...
Page 503 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 10-31 I/F Mode, Current Command  Default: 40 Settings 0–150% rated current of the motor  Sets the current command for the drive in the low speed area (low speed area: Frequency command < Pr.10-39). When the motor stalls on heavy duty start-up or forward/reverse with load, increase the parameter value.
Page 504 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  If the switch point is too high, the drive easily runs in the frequency area of the I/F mode for a long time, which generates a larger current and cannot save energy. (If the current value for Pr.10-31 is too high, the high switch point makes the drive continue to output with the setting value for Pr.10-31).
Page 505 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 10-49 Zero Voltage Time During Start-up  Default: 00.000 Settings 00.000–60.000 sec.  This parameter is valid only when the setting of Pr.07-12 (Speed Tracking during Start-up) = 0.  When the motor is in static state at start-up, this increases the accuracy when estimating angles. In order to put the motor in static state, set the three-phase drive output to 0 V to the motor.
Page 506 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11 Advanced Parameters In this parameter group, ASR stands for Adjust Speed Regulator.  You can set this parameter during operation. 11-00 System Control Default: 0 Settings bit 0: Auto-tuning for ASR bit 1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode) bit 2: Zero servo bit 3: Dead time compensation closed bit 7: Save or do not save the frequency...
Page 507 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  bit1=0: no function. bit1= 1: Inertia estimation function is enabled. bit1 setting would not activate the estimation process, set Pr.05-00=12 to begin FOC / TQC Sensorless inertia estimating.  bit2 = 0: no function. bit2 = 1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use the zero-servo function as position control.
Page 508 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-01 Per Unit of System Inertia Default: 256 Settings 1–65535 (256 = 1 PU)  To get the system inertia per unit from Pr.11-01, you need to set Pr.11-00 to bit1 = 1 and execute continuous forward/reverse running.
Page 509 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-05 Zero-speed Bandwidth  Default: 10 Settings 1–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM)  After estimating the inertia and setting Pr.11-00 bit 0 = 1 (auto-tuning), you can adjust Pr.11-03, 11-04 and 11-05 separately according to the speed response. The larger the setting value, the faster the response.
Page 510 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-13 PDFF Gain Value  Default: 30 Settings 0–200%  This parameter is invalid when Pr.05-24 = 1.  This parameter is valid only when Pr.11-00 bit0 = 1.  After you estimate and set Pr.11-00 bit0= 1 (auto-tuning), use Pr.11-13 to reduce overshoot. However, a shift of the curve may occur earlier.
Page 511 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-17 Forward Motor Torque Limit  11-18 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit  11-19 Reverse Motor Torque Limit  11-20 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit  Default: 500 Settings 0–500%  FOCPG & FOC Sensorless mode: The motor rated current = 100%.
Page 512 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-21 Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1 Gain Value  Default: 90 Settings 0–200% 11-22 Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2 Gain Value  Default: 90 Settings 0–200%  Adjusts the output voltage for the flux weakening curve. ...
Page 513 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-26 APR Curve Time  Default: 3.00 Settings 0.00–655.35 sec.  This is valid when the multi-function input terminal is set to 35 (ON). The larger the setting value, the longer the positioning time. 11-27 Maximum Torque Command ...
Page 514 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-30 High Torque Command Compensation  Default: 30.0 Settings -100.0–100.0% 11-31 Middle Torque Command Compensation  Default: 20.0 Settings -100.0–100.0% 11-32 Low Torque Command Compensation  Default: 10.0 Settings -100.0–100.0%  When Pr.11-28 is set to 3, the torque offset source uses Pr.11-30, Pr.11-31 or Pr.11-32 determined by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33).
Page 515 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-36 Speed Limit Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: Pr.11-37 (forward speed limit) and Pr.11-38 (reverse speed limit) 1: Speed limit source is Pr.00-20 (master frequency command source), and Pr.11-37 / Pr.11-38 2: Pr.00-20 (master frequency command source) 3: Speed limit source is the linear speed of tension control ...
Page 516 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-37 Forward Speed Limit (Torque Mode)  Default: 10 Settings 0–120% 11-38 Reverse Speed Limit (Torque Mode)  Default: 10 Settings 0–120%  Limits the speed for forward and reverse running in torque mode (Pr.01-00 maximum operation frequency = 100%).
Page 517 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-43 Position Control Maximum Frequency  Default: 60.00 Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz  Set the maximum operating frequency when the drive is in position control mode.  Also sets the speed limit for pulse-train positioning position control. If the output frequency reaches the maximum frequency for position control, the system uses the maximum frequency for position control as the operating frequency and slowly executes the remaining pulse-train commands.
Page 518 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  This parameter smooths the position command for single-point positioning and point-to-point positioning control mode, especially the application for the operation of mechanical structure. When the load inertia increases, the inertia of motor generated during the stop also increases, further worsens the smoothness of the operation.
Page 519 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-54 Treatment to the Large Position Error  Default: 0 Settings 0: Warn and continue operation (display oPE on keypad) 1: Fault and ramp to stop (display oPEE on keypad) 2: Fault and coast to stop (display oPEE on keypad) ...
Page 520 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 bit No. Setting Description bit2 = 1: Software limit switch function is enabled when the drive is in multi-step positioning and pulse-train positioning position control modes  The action of software / hardware switches and control modes: Control Mode Setting VFPG...
Page 521 1. The position, speed and torque command source are all from CANopen. 2. The position, speed and torque command source are communication card, and the communication decoding method is CiA402 or Delta defines 60xx.  Pr.11-60 bit 8 (Operation direction definition) is valid after powering ON again.
Page 522 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-68 Homing Method Default: 0008h Settings 0000h–0128h  Used for establishing the coordinate system that uses accumulated multiple revolution for the motor encoder.  How to set Pr.11-68: For example: Set Pr.11-68 = 012h when using homing method 4 ...
Page 523 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  You can use Pr.11-68–Pr.11-74 and MIx = 47 (enable the homing function) to execute homing position control.  The correspondence between XYZ and CiA402 for homing mode selection: CiA402 物件 0x6098H Function Description Z-phase Homing Home...
Page 524 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 CiA402 物件 0x6098H Function Description Z-phase Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 1 to 0). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 525 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 CiA402 物件 0x6098H Function Description Z-phase Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction and use the ORG switch (from 0 to 1) as the origin. Stops when encountering the positive limit switch.
Page 526 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the positive limit switch.  Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin. Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the negative limit switch. ...
Page 527 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to  1). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin. Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 ...
Page 528 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Locate the Z-phase signal in the forward direction and use the Z-phase signal as the origin.  Locate the Z-phase signal in the reverse direction and use the Z-phase signal as the origin.  Execute homing position control in the forward direction and use the positive limit switch or the ...
Page 529 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Execute homing position control in the reverse direction and use the negative limit switch or the  ORG switch as the origin. Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the positive limit switch. ...
Page 530 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 1 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the negative limit switch. Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 531 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 2 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the positive limit switch. Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 532 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 3 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 533 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 4 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, continue locating the Z-phase signal in the same direction as the origin.
Page 534 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 5 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 535 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 6 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, continue locating the Z-phase signal in the same direction as the origin.
Page 536 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 7 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 537 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 8 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, continue locating the Z-phase signal in the same direction as the origin.
Page 538 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 9 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 1 to 0). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 539 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 10 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 1 to 0). Then, continue locating the Z-phase signal in the same direction as the origin.
Page 540 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 11 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 541 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 12 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 0 to 1). Then, continue locating the Z-phase signal in the same direction as the origin.
Page 542 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 13 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 1 to 0). Then, the direction is reversed to locate the Z-phase signal as the origin.
Page 543 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 14 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction until encountering the ORG switch (from 1 to 0). Then, continue locating the Z-phase signal in the same direction as the origin.
Page 544 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 15 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction and use the negative limit switch as the origin. 1. The initial movement is in the reverse direction. 2.
Page 545 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 16 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction and use the positive limit switch as the origin. 1. The initial movement is in the forward direction. 2.
Page 546 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 17 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting No correspondence See the diagram for homing method 19 1. The initial movement direction depends on the ORG switch status. The initial movement is in the reverse direction if the ORG switch is active;...
Page 547 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 18 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction and use the ORG switch (from 0 to 1) as the origin. Stops when encountering the positive limit switch.
Page 548 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 19 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting No correspondence See the diagram for homing method 21 1. The initial movement direction depends on the ORG switch status. The initial movement is in the forward direction if the ORG switch is active;...
Page 549 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 20 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction and use the ORG switch (from 0 to 1) as the origin. Stops when encountering the negative limit switch.
Page 550 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 21 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting No correspondence See the diagram for homing method 23 1. The initial movement direction depends on the ORG switch status. The initial movement is in the reverse direction if the ORG switch is active;...
Page 551 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 22 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction and use the ORG switch (from 0 to 1) as the origin. When encountering the positive limit switch, the direction is reversed to the locate the origin.
Page 552 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 23 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting No correspondence See the diagram for homing method 25 1. The initial movement is in the forward direction. 2.
Page 553 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 24 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the forward direction and use the ORG switch (from 1 to 0) as the origin. When encountering the positive limit switch, the direction is reversed to locate the origin.
Page 554 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 25 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting No correspondence See the diagram for homing method 27 1. The initial movement direction depends on the ORG switch status. The initial movement is in the forward direction if the ORG switch is active;...
Page 555 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 26 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction and use the ORG switch (from 0 to 1) as the origin. When encountering the negative limit switch, the direction is reversed to locate the origin.
Page 556 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 27 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting No correspondence See the diagram for homing method 29 1. The initial movement is in the reverse direction. 2.
Page 557 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 28 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Execute homing position control in the reverse direction and use the ORG switch (from 1 to 0) as the origin. When encountering the negative limit switch, the direction is reversed to locate the origin.
Page 558 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 29 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Locate the Z-phase signal in the reverse direction and use the Z-phase signal as the origin. Stops when encountering the negative limit switch.
Page 559 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 30 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Locate the Z-phase signal in the forward direction and use the Z-phase signal as the origin. Stops when encountering the positive limit switch.
Page 560 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 31 CiA402 object 0x6098H Z-phase Function Description Homing Home Homing Signal Method Limit Mode Setting Use the current position as the origin. 1. The current position is used as the origin (this function is available even when the drive is in stop status).
Page 561 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-69 Homing Control Time Out Default: 60.0 Settings 0.0–6000.0 sec. Set the time limit for completing the homing process. When executing homing position control, a  fault occurs for the drive if positioning time exceeds Pr.11-69. 11-70 Homing Control First Step Speed ...
Page 562 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-73 Homing Control Offset (Revolution)  Default: 0 Settings -30000–30000 resolutions 11-74 Homing Control Offset (Pulse)  Default: 0 Settings Refer to Pr.10-01 setting  Pr.11-73 and Pr.11-74 are the offset number of revolutions and pulses required for the coordinate system origin (mechanical origin) position determined after the homing positioning process is completed.
Page 563 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 11-78 HALT Revived Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: Stopped 1: Continue according to the previous position command  When executing multi-step positioning position control through communications: If 6000h bit3 = 1, the drive stops at zero speed in a Servo ON status according to the deceleration time for position control.
Page 564 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12 Tension Control Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation. 12-00 Tension Control Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: Disabled 1: Closed-loop tension, speed mode 2: Closed-loop linear speed, speed mode 3: Closed-loop tension, torque mode 4: Open-loop tension, torque mode ...
Page 565 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Example: A summary of the parameters – Tension closed-loop, speed mode Parameter name Setting Note Master frequency command source (AUTO, Inputs from external analog 00-20 REMOTE) (refer to Pr.03-00) Tractor (Drive 1) 00-21 Operation command source (AUTO, REMOTE) Operates by using external terminals 02-16 Multi-function output 2 (MO1)
Page 566 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Example: A summary of the parameters – Closed-loop linear speed, speed mode Parameter name Setting Note 10-00 Encoder type selection Pulse input Phases A and B are pulse inputs, 10-16 Pulse input type setting forward direction if A-phase leads B- phase by 90 degrees.
Page 567 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Example: A summary of the parameters – Tension closed-loop, torque mode Parameter name Setting Note 00-21 Operation command source (AUTO, REMOTE) Operates by using external terminals 02-03 Multi-function input command 3 (MI3) Torque command direction 03-00 AVI analog input selection Tension PID feedback signal...
Page 568 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Setting value 4: Open-loop tension, torque mode �� ∙ �� Torque (�� − ��) = F: Tension (N) D: Reel diameter (m) Example: A summary of the parameters – Tension open-loop, torque mode Parameter name Setting Note...
Page 569 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-01 Winding Mode Default: 0 Settings 0: Rewind 1: Unwind  When Pr.12-01 = 1, the tension taper function is invalid.  When using rewind mode, the reel diameter (D) increases gradually; when using unwind mode, the reel diameter (D) decreases gradually.
Page 570 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-05 PID Target Value  Default: 50.0 Settings 0.0–100.0%  This parameter is valid when Pr.12-00 = 1 or 2.  Under the condition of closed-loop linear speed and speed mode (Pr.12-00 = 2), sets Pr.03-00, Pr.03-01 to 15 (Linear speed) as the linear speed PID command.
Page 571 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When setting as 2: 12-08 Tension PID P Gain 1 Default: 50.0 Settings 0.0–1000.0 12-09 Tension PID I Integral Time 1 Default: 1.00 Settings 0.00–500.00 sec. 12-11 Tension PID P Gain 2 Default: 50.0 Settings 0.0–1000.0 12-12...
Page 572 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-17 Tension PID Feedback Upper Limit Default: 100.0 Settings 0.0–100.0%  This parameter is valid when Pr.12-00 = 1 or 3. 12-18 Tension PID Feedback Lower Limit Default: 0.0 Settings 0.0–100.0%  This parameter is valid when Pr.12-00 = 1 or 3. 12-19 Linear Speed Input Command Source Default: 0...
Page 573 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-22 Pulses Per Meter Default: 0.0 Settings 0.0–6000.0 pulse/m  When Pr.12-06 = 1, you have to set this parameter.  If the command source of the linear speed input is the pulses input from PG card or the pulses input by terminal MI6 / MI7 (Pr.12-19 =3 or 5), then you have to set this parameter.
Page 574 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When setting as 1, sets AVI / ACI analog input to be reel diameter (Pr.03-00, Pr.03-01 = d16), 10V corresponds to the maximum reel diameter (Pr.12-28).  When setting as 2, you can get the reel diameter from the encoder on the reel axle. At the moment, connects the pulse signals to the PG2 of the PG card (inputs pulse command), sets the encoder type (Pr.10-00), pulse input type (Pr.10-16), pulse per revolution (Pr.12-34), revolutions per layer (Pr.12-35), and material thickness (Pr.12-36) to calculate the reel diameter.
Page 575 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Pulse Signal Parameter Position Related parameters Note signal interface settings Pr.12-27 = 3 The settings of Pr.10-01 and Pr.10-00 = 1 Pr.12-02, Pr.12-03, Pr.12-35, Pr.10-02 are depending on Pr.12-36 the working condition Pr.12-27 = 3 Pr.10-00 = 1 Encoder Pr.12-02, 12-03, 12-34, 12-35,...
Page 576 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-32 Initial Reel Diameter 1 Default: 1.0 Settings 1.0–6000.0 mm 12-33 Initial Reel Diameter 2 Default: 1.0 Settings 1.0–6000.0 mm  If user chooses more than one type of reel diameter, you can set Pr.12-30 as 0 (using RS-485 communication input).
Page 577 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-38 Automatic Reel Diameter Compensation Default: 0 Settings 0: Disabled 1: Enabled  This parameter is valid only when Pr.12-00 = 1 and Pr.12-19 ≠ 0. If the mechanical gear ratio or the linear speed is not accurate enough, you can use this parameter to compensate the reel diameter.
Page 578 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  You can set Pr.12-42 = 1 when activating the tension function, by doing this to prevent the loose rewinding / unwinding material or the value exceeds the setting range of Pr.12-45 from causing the tension convergent time to be too long.
Page 579 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-54 Tension Command Source Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: RS-485 communication input 1: Analog input  This parameter is valid when Pr.12-00 = 3 or 4.  When Pr.12-54 = 0, you can use digital keypad, HMI page planning, or text panel (TP series of PLC products) to change the tension command setting value of Pr.12-56 by using communication.
Page 580 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-59 Zero-speed Tension Threshold (Linear Speed)  Default: 0 Settings 0–100.00%  This parameter is valid when Pr.12-00 = 3 or 4.  When linear speed is lower than the value set in Pr.12-59, then the tension value is Pr.12-58 and reaches the static friction tension compensation.
Page 581 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-65 Tension Taper Curve Selection Default: 0 Settings 0: No taper 1: Curve taper 2: Linear taper 3: Multi-step curve taper 4: Multi-step linear taper  When Pr.12-01 = 1, this function is invalid. ...
Page 582 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When Pr.12-65 = 4, determines the multi-step linear taper by Pr.12-67, Pr.12-71 and Pr.12-72; and determines the turning points by Pr.12-69 and Pr.12-70. 12-66 Tension Taper Setting Source Default: 0 Settings 0: RS-485 communication input 1: Analog input 12-67 Tension Taper Value...
Page 583 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-68 Tension Taper Curve Compensation Value Default: 0 Settings 0–60000 12-69 Multi-step Taper Reel Diameter 1 Default: 6000.0 Settings 10.0–6000.0 12-70 Multi-step Taper Reel Diameter 2 Default: 6000.0 Settings 10.0–6000.0 12-71 Multi-step Taper Value 1 ...
Page 584 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-76 Speed Limit Gain  Default: 0 Settings 0–65535 sec.  In tension mode, when using the analog quantity of linear speed signal as the speed limit (sets Pr.11-36 = 3), you can use this parameter to adjust the value of the speed limit. 12-77 Tension Control Flag ...
Page 585 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Tension related multi-function display (user-defined) Setting value Function name Display the current reel diameter under the tension control (d) (unit: mm) Pr.00-04 Display the current line speed under the tension control (L) (unit: m / minute) Display the current tension setting value under the tension control (T) (unit: N) 12.1-12-22...
Page 586 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 13 Macro (User-defined)  You can set this parameter during operation. 13-00 Application Selection Default: 00 Settings 00: Disabled 01: User-defined parameter 02: Compressor 03: Fan 04: Pump 05: Conveyor 06: Machine tool 07: Packing 08: Textiles 10: Logistics 11: Tension PID function...
Page 587 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Settings 01-13 Deceleration time 1 20 (s) 03-00 AVI analog input selection 0 (No function) 03-01 ACI analog input selection 1 (Frequency command) 05-01 Full-load current for induction motor 1 (A) Default setting 05-03 Rated speed for induction motor 1 (rpm) Default setting...
Page 588 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Settings 03-01 ACI analog input selection 1 (Frequency command) 03-28 AVI terminal input selection 0 (0–10 V) 03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1 (0–10 V) 03-31 AFM output selection 0 (0–10 V) 03-50 Analog input curve selection 1 (three-point curve of AVI)
Page 589 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Group setting 05: Conveyor The following table lists the conveyor setting application related parameters. Parameter Name Settings 00-11 Speed control mode 0 (IMV/F control mode) 00-16 Duty selection 0 (Normal duty) Master frequency command source 00-20 2 (Inputs from external analog) (AUTO, REMOTE)
Page 590 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Settings 01-26 S-curve deceleration begin time 1 01-27 S-curve deceleration arrival time 2 02-03 Multi-function input command 3 (MI3) 1 (Multi-step speed command 1) 02-04 Multi-function input command 4 (MI4) 2 (Multi-step speed command 2) 02-13 Multi-function output 1 RY1 11 (Malfunction indication)
Page 591 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Settings 01-24 S-curve acceleration begin time 1 Default setting 01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2 Default setting 01-26 S-curve deceleration begin time 1 Default setting 01-27 S-curve deceleration arrival time 2 Default setting 03-00 AVI analog input selection 1 (Frequency command)
Page 592 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Setting 10: Logistics The following table lists the relevant logistics setting application parameters. Parameter Name Settings Master frequency command source 00-20 7 (Digital keypad potentiometer knob) (AUTO, REMOTE) Operation command source 00-21 1 (External terminals) (AUTO, REMOTE) 01-00 Motor 1 maximum operation frequency...
Page 593 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Settings 03-65 AVI voltage mid-point 9.99 03-66 AVI voltage proportional mid-point 100% 1 (Negative PID feedback: by analog 08-00 Terminal selection of PID feedback input (Pr.03-00)) 08-01 Terminal selection of PID feedback 08-02 Integral time (I) 08-20...
Page 594 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Name Settings 08-65 Source of PID target value 1 (From Pr.08-66) 08-66 PID target value setting Master and auxiliary reverse running cutoff 08-67 frequency 13-00 – Application Parameters (User-defined)  13-50 12.1-13-9...
Page 595 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 12.1-13-10...
Page 596 Default: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Frequency command (in MH300 series, this function can be the torque limit in torque control mode) 2: Torque command (torque limit in speed mode) 3: Torque compensation command 4: PID target value 5: PID feedback signal...
Page 597 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 14-02 AI10 Analog Input Bias  Default: 0.0 Settings -100.0–100.0%  Sets the corresponding AI10 voltage for the external analog input 0. 14-03 AI11 Analog Input Bias  Default: 0.0 Settings -100.0–100.0%  Sets the corresponding AI11 current for the external analog input 0. 14-04 AI10 Analog input bias ...
Page 598 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 01 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 02 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 03 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% 12.1-14-3...
Page 599 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 04 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 05 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 06 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% 12.1-14-4...
Page 600 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 07 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 08 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 09 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% 12.1-14-5...
Page 601 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 10 Pr.14-02 = -10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 11 Pr.14-02 = -10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 12 Pr.14-02 = -10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% 12.1-14-6...
Page 602 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 13 Pr.14-02 = -10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 14 Pr.14-02 = -10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 15 Pr.14-02 = -10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% 12.1-14-7...
Page 603 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 16 Pr.14-02 = -10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 100% Diagram 17 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1% 10/9 = 111.1% Diagram 18 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1% 10/9 = 111.1%...
Page 604 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 19 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1% 10/9 = 111.1% Diagram 20 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1% 10/9 = 111.1% Diagram 21 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1%...
Page 605 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 22 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1% 10/9 = 111.1% Diagram 23 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1% 10/9 = 111.1% Diagram 24 Pr.14-02 = 10% Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-06 Analog Input Gain (AI10) = 111.1%...
Page 606 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 25 Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-02= Pr.14-06= Diagram 26 Pr.14-04–14-05 Diagram 27 Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-02= Pr.14-06= 12.1-14-11...
Page 607 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 28 Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-02= Pr.14-06= Diagram 29 Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-02= Pr.14-06= Diagram 30 Pr.14-04–14-05 12.1-14-12...
Page 608 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Diagram 31 Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-02= Pr.14-06= Diagram 32 Pr.14-04–14-05 Pr.14-02= Pr.14-06= 14-06 AI10 Analog Input Gain  14-07 AI11 Analog Input Gain  Default: 100.0 Settings -500.0–500.0%  Use Pr.14-06–14-07 when the source of the frequency command is the analog voltage / current signal.
Page 609 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  The analog signals enter via the control terminals AI1 and AI2 commonly cause interference. This might affect the stability of the analog control, use these input delays to filter a noisy analog signal. ...
Page 610 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Settings Functions Descriptions Id feedback value (2.5 x rated current) is processed as 100%. Vq-axis voltage command 250 V (500 V) = 100% Vd-axis voltage command 250 V (500 V) = 100% Torque command Rated current of motor = 100% PG2 frequency command Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
Page 611 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 14-18 Extension Card (AI10) Input Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: 0–10 V (AVI10) 1: 0–20 mA (ACI10) 2: 4–20 mA (ACI10) 14-19 Extension Card (AI11) Input Selection  Default: 0 Settings 0: 0–10 V (AVI11) 1: 0–20 mA (ACI11) 2: 4–20 mA (ACI11) ...
Page 612 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 14-27 AI10 Extension Card Proportional Mid-point  Default: 50.00 Settings 0.00–100.00% 14-28 AI10 Extension Card Highest Point  Default: 10.00 Settings Pr.14-18 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V Pr.14-18 ≠ 0, 0.00–20.00 mA or 4–20 mA 14-29 AI10 Extension Card Proportional Highest Point ...
Page 613 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 14-35 AI10 Extension Card Proportional Highest Point  Default: 100.00 Settings 0.00–100.00%  When Pr.14-19 = 0, the voltage type is 0–10 V analog input and the unit is in voltage (V). When Pr.14-19 ≠ 0, the current type is 0–20 mA or 4–20 mA and the unit is in current (mA). ...
Page 614 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 14-51 DC bus Voltage at Malfunction 2 14-55 DC bus Voltage at Malfunction 3 14-59 DC bus Voltage at Malfunction 4 14-63 DC bus Voltage at Malfunction 5 14-67 DC bus Voltage at Malfunction 6 Default: Read only Settings 0.0–6553.5 V...
Page 615 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) 8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) 9: Over-voltage at constant speed (ovn) 10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) 11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) 12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) 13: Low-voltage at constant speed (Lvn) 14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS) 15: Phase loss protection (orP) 16: IGBT overheating (oH1)
Page 616 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 58: Modbus transmission time-out (CE10) 61: Y-connection / Δ-connection switch error (ydc) 62: Deceleration energy backup error (dEb) 63: Over-slip (oSL) 65: Hardware error of PG card (PGF5) 72: STO loss (STL1) 76: Safe torque off (STo) 77: STO loss 2 (STL2) 78: STO loss 3 (STL3) 79: U-phase Over-current before run (Aoc)
Page 617 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  When the dEb function is effective and enabled, the drive starts the dEb function and also records the fault code 62 to Pr.06-17–06-22, Pr.14-70–14-73 at the same time. 14-74 Over-torque Detection Action (Motor 3) ...
Page 618 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 14-80 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection 3 (Motor 3)  14-82 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection 4 (Motor 4)  Default: 2 Settings 0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling) 1: Standard motor (motor with the fan on the shaft) 2: Disable ...
Page 619 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  The electronic thermal relay action condition follows the settings for Pr.14-80 /Pr.14-82: Pr.14-80 / Pr.14-82 set to 0 (inverter motor with external forced cooling): When the drive output current is higher than 150% of the rated current for the motor (refer to the motor independent cooling curve figure above), the drive starts to count the time.
Page 620 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-2 Adjustment & Application The followings are abbreviations for different types of motors:  IM: Induction motor  PM: Permanent magnet synchronous AC motor  IPM: Interior permanent magnet synchronous AC motor  SPM: Surface permanent magnet synchronous AC motor 12-2-1 Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor, Space Vector Control Adjustment Procedure (PM SVC, Pr.00-11=2) ...
Page 621 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 PM SVC adjustment procedure  (The number marked on the procedure corresponds to the number of following adjustment explanations) PM SVC motor parameters adjustment flowchart PM SVC Adjustment Procedure 1. Parameter Reset ( Ver.2.04 and above) Pr.00-02=9 or 10 2.
Page 622 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Basic motor parameters adjustment 1. Parameter reset: Reset Pr.00-02 = 9 (50 Hz) or 10 (60 Hz) to the default value. 2. Select PM motor type: Pr.05-33 = 1 (SPM) or 2 (IPM) 3.
Page 623 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 PM SVC adjustment flowchart for operation with no load / light load 8. No-load Running SPM > Increase Pr.10-42 SPM > Decrease Pr.10-42 Initial angle detection pulse Initial angle detection pulse value value （Too high pulse bandwidth may IPM >...
Page 624 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 A2. Operates the motor in 1/2 of the rated rotor speed, adjust the no-load operating current If the no-load operating current exceeds 20% of the rated current, increase Pr.07-26 (torque compensation gain) and observe the no-load operating current. A3.
Page 625 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 III. PM SVC adjustment flowchart for operation starts with load 9. Running Test with Load B1. Low-frequency carrier performance (1/10 rated freq. and below) Decrease PM current level Increase PM current level of of the open-loop low-speed open-loop low-speed area area (Pr.10-31)
Page 626 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Adjustment for operation with heavy load 9. Load operating test B1. Low-frequency loading performance is below 1/10 of rated frequency: a. If the low-frequency loading performance is insufficient, or the rotor speed is not smooth, increase Pr.10-31 (current command of I/F mode).
Page 627 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-2-2 Permanent-Magnet Synchronuous Motor, Field-Oriented Control and with Encoder Adjustment Procedure (PM FOCPG, Pr,00-11=4) PM FOCPG Control diagram  12.2-8...
Page 628 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  PM FOCPG adjustment procedure (The number marked on the procedure corresponds to the number of following adjustment explanations) PM FOCPG motor parameters adjustment flowchart PMFOC+PG Adjustment Procedure 1.Parameter Reset (Ver.2.04 and above) Pr.00-02=9 or10 2.Pr.05-33 Choose motor =1(SPM) / 2(IPM) 電機參數設定...
Page 629 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 7.Re-power after Power Off 8.PM Motor Inertia Estimation 1) Pr.00-11=4 FOCPG control 2) Set the running frequency to 2/3 of the motor rated frequency. 3) Set the accel./decel. time as 1/10 of the default value. (Adjust the accel./decel time based on the load inertia.
Page 630 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Description Pr.05-36 Rated rotor speed (RPM) Pr.05-37 Number of poles for the motor (poles) 4. PM parameter auto-tuning: Set Pr.05-00 = 5 (rolling auto-tuning for PM, with no load) or 13 (static auto-tuning for PM) and press RUN key to finish motor auto-tuning, then you will get the following parameters: Parameter Description...
Page 631 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 (adjust the acceleration / deceleration time according to the load inertia. The smaller the load inertia, the shorter the acceleration / deceleration time is set). (4) Check if the load and the motor is connected. (5) Set Pr.
Page 632 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 PM FOC+PG adjustment flowchart for operation without load / with light load 9.No-load Trial Run Set 10Hz frequency command to proceed encoder running test Set Pr.10-02 input =2 A1. Start running in (Phase B leads 90 degree the reverse direction? in a forward run command the phase A)
Page 633 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Adjustment for operation with no load / light load 9. No-load trial run Set the frequency command to 10 Hz to proceed the encoder running test: A1. If the motor starts in a reverse direction. If the motor starts in a reverse direction, set the encoder input type Pr.
Page 634 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Description Default Pr.11-00 System control Pr.11-01 Per unit of system inertia ASR1/ASR2 switch frequency Pr.11-02 (it is suggested to set the switch frequency 7.00 Hz higher than Pr.10-39) Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 10 Hz Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 10 Hz...
Page 635 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 C2. With-load accelerating performance testing in heavy-load status, accelerate the motor to the rated rotor speed according to the acceleration time. If the motor rotor speed cannot follow the acceleration time, and the response is too slow, increase Pr.11-04 (ASR2 high-speed bandwidth) and Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth);...
Page 636 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-2-3 Induction Motor, Sensorless Field-Oriented Control Adjustment Procedure (IMFOC Sensorless, Pr.00-11=5)  Control diagram 12.2-17...
Page 637 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Adjustment procedure 12.2-18...
Page 638 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Basic motor parameters adjustment 1. Parameter reset: Reset Pr.00-02 = 9 (50 Hz) or 10 (60 Hz) to the default value. 2. Select PM motor type: Pr.05-33 = 0 (IM) 3. Motor nameplate parameter setting: Parameter Description Pr.01-01...
Page 639 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 If an auto-tuning error (AUE) occurs, refer to Chapter 14 “Fault Codes and Descriptions” for further treatment. AUE Error (code) Description AUE (40) Auto-tuning error AUE1 (142) Auto-tuning error 1 (No feedback current error) AUE2 (143) Auto-tuning error 2 (Motor phase loss error) AUE3 (144)
Page 640 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 8. Adjust the setting of FOC speed observer and per-unit value of inertia (common problems) Pr.10-25: Set up FOC bandwidth of speed observer  Situation 1. Speed command changes rapidly, but speed response cannot follow. (Speed response is too slow→Increase the setting value) Situation 2.
Page 641 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 Parameter Description Unit Default Settings Rotor resistance (Rr) for induction 05-07 Ω 0.000 0.000–65.535 motor 1 (Ω) Magnetizing inductance (Lm) for 05-08 0.0–6553.5 induction motor 1 (mH) Stator inductance (Lx) for induction 05-09 0.0–6553.5 motor 1 (mH) FOC bandwidth for speed 10-25...
Page 642 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 12-2-4 Interior Permanent-Magnet Synchrounous, Sensorless Fieled-Oriented Control Adjustment Procedure (IPM Sensorless, Pr.00-11=7) Control diagram  IPM Sensorless FOC control is the control method dedicated for IPM, it uses the high salient pole characteristic (Lq > Ld) of IPM to detect the positions of NS magnetic poles. By doing this, it calculates the motor’s rotor position at low-speed frequency.
Page 643 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 IPM Sensorless adjustment procedure  (The number marked on the procedure corresponds to the number of following adjustment explanations) I. IPM Sensorless adjustment flowchart PM FOC Sensorless 1. Parameter Reset Adjustment Procedure Pr.00-02=9 or 10 （Ver.2.04 and above) 2.
Page 644 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Basic motor parameters adjustment Parameter reset: Reset Pr.00-02=9 (50Hz) or 10 (60Hz) to the default value. Select IPM motor type: Pr.05-33=2 (IPM) Motor nameplate parameter setting: Parameter Description Pr.01-01 Rated frequency (Hz) Pr.01-02 Rated voltage (V Pr.05-33 PM motor type (IPM or SPM)
Page 645 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 IPM Sensorless adjustment flowchart for operation without load / with light load 8. No-load Running (a) Set speed regulator ASR Pr.11-00=1 ASR auto-tuning (b) No-load started to ½ rated rotor speed Increase Pr.10-52 injection magnitude Increase Pr.10-52 Increase Pr.10-42 initial angle detection Angle detection of high...
Page 646 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  No-load / light-load operation adjustment 8. Start the motor with no-load (a) Set Pr.11-00 = 1 Auto-tuning for ASR and APR (b) Start the motor without load, and operates the motor to 1/2 of rated rotor speed a.
Page 647 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 III. IPM Sensorless adjustment flowchart for operation starts with load 10. Running Test with Load B1. Low-frequency loaded performance （Frequency of Pr.10-39 and below） Increase ASR1 bandwidth Decrease ASR1 bandwidth Pr.11-03 Pr.11-03 Increase system inertia Decrease system inertia Pr.11-01 Pr.11-01...
Page 648 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300  Load operation adjustment 1. Load operating test B1. Low-frequency loading performance, when the switch frequency is below Pr.10-39: a. When the low-frequency cannot start the motor with load, or the rotor speed is not smooth, increase Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth) or Pr.11-01 (per-unit of system inertia);...
Page 649 Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 12.2-30...
Page 650 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 Chapter 13 Warning Codes Summary of Warning Codes ID No. Warning Name ID No. Warning Name No record CANopen format error (CPtn) Communication error 1 (CE1) PLC opposite defect (PLod) Communication error 2 (CE2) PLC save memory error (PLSv) Communication error 3 (CE3) Data defect (PLdA) Communication error 4 (CE4)
Page 651 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Warning Name ID No. Warning Name Copy PLC: version error (CPLv) Copy PLC: time-out (CPLt) Copy PLC: size error (CPLS) InrCOM time-out (ictn) Copy PLC: PLC function (CPLF) 13-2...
Page 652 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Communication error RS-485 Modbus illegal function code 1 (CE1) Action and Reset Action condition When the function code is not 03, 06, 10 and 63. Action time Immediately Warning treatment parameter N/A “Warning”...
Page 653 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Communication error RS-485 Modbus illegal data address (00–254 H) 2 (CE2) Action and Reset Action condition When the input data address is incorrect. Action time Immediately Warning treatment parameter N/A “Warning”...
Page 654 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Communication error RS-485 Modbus illegal data value 3 (CE3) Action and Reset Action condition When the length of communication data is too long. Action time Immediately Warning treatment parameter N/A “Warning”...
Page 655 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Communication error RS-485 Modbus data is written to read-only 4 (CE4) address. Action and Reset Action condition When the data is written to read-only address. Action time Immediately Warning treatment parameter N/A “Warning”...
Page 656 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Communication error RS-485 Modbus transmission time-out 10 (CE10) Action and Reset When the communication time exceeds the detection time for Pr.09-33 Action condition communication time-out. Action time Settings for Pr.09-03 Warning treatment parameter N/A “Warning”...
Page 657 Slave. Check if the error occurs randomly, or only occurs when copying certain Control board error parameters (the error displays on the upper right corner of the copy page). If you cannot clear the error, please contact Delta. 13-8...
Page 658 It is suggested to check the status of Data ROM and remove the error causes first. If you cannot clear the error, please contact Delta. Malfunction caused by Verify the wiring and grounding of the main circuit, control circuit and the interference encoder for effective anti-interference performance.
Page 659 Chapter 13 Warning CodesMH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description The AC motor drive detects over-heating of IGBT, and over the protection level of oH1 warning. IGBT over-heating (When Pr.06-15 is higher than the IGBT over- warning (oH1) heating level, the drive shows oH1 error without displaying oH1 warning.) Action and Reset Action condition...
Page 660 Chapter 13 Warning CodesMH300 Model oH warning Voltage oH1 (ºC) oH1 warning = Pr.06-15 (ºC) (NOTE: x＝A or E) VFD1A6MH23x□□A□ VFD2A8MH23x□□A□ VFD5A0MH23x□□A□ VFD7A5MH23x□□A□ VFD11AMH23x□□A□ VFD17AMH23x□□A□ Three-phase VFD25AMH23x□□A□ _230V VFD33AMH23x□□A□ VFD49AMH23x□□A□ VFD65AMH23x□□A□ VFD75AMH23x□□A□ VFD90AMH23x□□A□ VFD120MH23x□□A□ VFD146MH23x□□A□ VFD1A5MH43x□□A□ VFD3A0MH43x□□A□ oH1 warning = oH1 – 5 VFD4A2MH43x□□A□...
Page 661 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PID feedback error PID feedback loss (warning for analog feedback (PID) signal; works only when PID enables) Action and Reset When the analog input is lower than 4 mA (only detects analog input 4– Action condition 20 mA).
Page 662 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ACI analog signal Analog input current loss (including all analog 4–20 loss (AnL) mA signals) Action and Reset When the analog input is lower than 4 mA (only detects analog input 4– Action condition 20 mA) Action time...
Page 663 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Under current (uC) Low current Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-71 Action time Pr.06-72 Pr.06-73 0: No function Warning treatment parameter 1: Fault and coast to stop 2: Fault and ramp to stop by 2 deceleration time 3: Warn and continue operation “Warning”...
Page 664 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PG feedback PG feedback error warning warning (PGFb) Action and Reset Action level Motor runs in a reverse direction to the direction of frequency command Action time Pr.10-09 Pr.10-08=0 0: Warn and operation continue Warning setting parameter 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2: Fault and coast to stop...
Page 665 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Over speed warning Over speed warning (oSPd) Action and Reset Action level The encoder feedback speed > Pr.10-10 Action time Pr.10-11 Pr.10-12=0 Warning setting parameter 0: Warn and keep operation Reset method “Warning”...
Page 666 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Speed deviation Over speed deviation warning warning (dAvE) Action and Reset Action level Pr.10-13 Action time Pr.10-14 Pr.10-15=0 Warning setting parameter 0: Warn and keep operation Reset method “Warning” automatically clears when the drive stops Reset condition After the drive stops Record...
Page 667 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Phase loss Input phase loss warning (PHL) Action and Reset Action level One of the phases outputs less than Pr.06-47 Action time Pr.06-46 Pr.06-45 Output Phase Loss Detection Action (OPHL) =0 Warning setting parameter 0: Warn and continue operation Reset method...
Page 668 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Over-torque 1 (ot1) Over-torque 1 warning Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-07 Action time Pr.06-08 Pr.06-06=1 or 3 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed Warning treatment parameter operation 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation...
Page 669 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Over-torque Over-torque 2 warning (ot2) Action and Reset Action level Pr.06-10 Action time Pr.06-11 Pr.06-09 Over-torque Detection Selection (Motor 2) =1 or 3 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed Warning setting parameter operation 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation...
Page 670 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Motor overheating warning. Motor over-heating 22_1 The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside (oH3) PTC the motor is too high Action and Reset Action level Pr.03-00=6 (PTC), PTC input level > Pr.06-30 PTC level (default=50%) Action time Immediately act Error treatment: Pr.06-29...
Page 671 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Motor overheating warning. Motor over-heating 22_2 The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside (oH3) PT100 the motor is too high. Action and Reset Action level Pr.03-00=11 (PT100), PT100 input level > Pr.06-57 (default=7 V) Action time Immediately act Error treatment: Pr.06-29...
Page 672 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 Adjust the settings for Pr.01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting V/F voltage is too high value for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load capacity decreases at low-speed). Check if the motor rated current matches the motor Configure the correct rated current value of the motor again.
Page 673 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Over slip warning. By using the maximum slip (Pr.10-29) as the base, Over slip warning when the drive outputs at constant speed, and the (oSL) F>H or F<H exceeds Pr.07-29 level and Pr.07-30 setting time, 100% Pr.07-29 = Pr.10-29.
Page 674 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Parameter auto-tuning is processing. Auto-tuning (tUn) When running auto-tuning, the keypad displays “tUn”. Action and Reset When running Pr.05-00 motor parameter auto-tuning, the keypad displays Action condition “tUn”. Action time Warning treatment parameter N/A When auto-tuning is finished and no error occurs, the warning Reset method...
Page 675 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Output phase loss Output phase loss (OPHL) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-47 Action time Pr.06-45 0: Warn and continue operation Warning treatment parameter 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2: Fault and coast to stop 3: No warning If Pr.06-45 is set to 0, the OPHL warning automatically clears after the...
Page 676 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy model error 3 Keypad COPY error 3: copy model error (SE3) Action and Reset “SE3” warning occurs when different drive identity codes are found during Action level copying parameters. Action time Immediately act when the error is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 677 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Over-torque Over-torque 3 warning (ot3) Action and Reset Action level Pr.14-75 Action time Pr.14-76 Pr.14-74 Over-torque Detection Selection (Motor 3) =1 or 3 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed Warning setting parameter operation 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation...
Page 678 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Over-torque Over-torque 4 warning (ot4) Action and Reset Action level Pr.14-78 Action time Pr.14-79 Pr.14-77 Over-torque Detection Selection (Motor 4) =1 or 3 0: No function 1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed Warning setting parameter operation 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation...
Page 679 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen guarding CANopen guarding time-out 1 time-out (CGdn) Action and Reset When CANopen Node Guarding detects that one of the slaves does not Action level respond, the CGdn error displays. The upper unit sets the factor and time during configuration.
Page 680 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen heartbeat CANopen heartbeat error error (CHbn) Action and Reset When CANopen Heartbeat detects that one of the slaves does not response, the CHbn error shows. Action level The upper unit sets the confirming time of producer and consumer during configuration.
Page 681 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen bus off CANopen BUS off error error (CbFn) Action and Reset Hardwar When CANopen card is not installed, the CbFn warning occurs. When the master receives wrong communication package, the CbFn warning occurs.
Page 682 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen index error CANopen index error (Cidn) Action and Reset Action level CANopen communication Index error Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual Reset Reset condition The upper unit sends a reset package to clear this warning...
Page 683 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen station CANopen station address error (only supports 1– address error (CAdn) 127) Action and Reset Action level CANopen station address error Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual Reset...
Page 684 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen memory CANopen memory error error (CFrn) Action and Reset When you update the firmware version of the control board, the FRAM Action level internal data does not change, then CFrn warning occurs. Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 685 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen SDO SDO transmission time-out (only shows on master time-out (CSdn) station) Action and Reset When the CANopen master transmits a SDO command, and the slave Action level response “times-out”, CSdn warning occurs. Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 686 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen SDO receives register CANopen SDO receives register overflow overflow (CSbn) Action and Reset The upper unit sends too much SDO at one time and causes buffer Action level overflow Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 687 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen start-up CANopen start-up error warning error warning (Cbtn) Action and Reset Action level When the amount of sent error messages reach 255 Action time Warning setting parameter Index 6007 Reset method Disable CANopen, and cycle the power after power-off Reset condition...
Page 688 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description CANopen format CANopen protocol format error error (CPtn) Action and Reset The slave detects that communication data from the upper unit cannot be Action level recognized, and then CPtn warning occurs. Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 689 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PLC opposite defect PLC download error warning (PLod) Action and Reset During PLC downloading, the program source code detects incorrect Action condition address (e.g. the address exceeds the range), then the PLod warning shows.
Page 690 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PLC save memory error Data error during PLC operation (PLSv) Action and Reset The program detects incorrect written address (e.g. the address has Action condition exceeded the range) during PLC operation, then the PLSv warning shows.
Page 691 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Data defect (PLdA) Data error during PLC operation Action and Reset T. The program detects incorrect write-in address when decoding the Action condition program source code and downloading the PLC program (e.g. the address has exceeded the range), then PLdA warning acts.
Page 692 Check if the program is correct and re-download the program. If the fault Reset method does not exist, the warning automatically clears. Reset condition Record Cause Corrective Actions Unsupported command has used while downloading the Check if the firmware of the drive is the old version. If yes, contact Delta. program 13-43...
Page 693 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PLC buffer overflow PLC register overflow (PLor) Action and Reset When PLC runs the last command and the command exceeds the Action condition maximum capacity of the program, the PLor warning shows. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 694 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Function defect Function code error during PLC operation (PLFF) Action and Reset The program detects incorrect command (unsupported command) during Action condition PLC operation, then PLFF warning shows. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter Check if the program is correct and re-download the program.
Page 695 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Checksum error PLC checksum error (PLSn) Action and Reset PLC checksum error is detected after power on, then PLSn warning Action condition shows Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter Check if the program is correct and re-download the program.
Page 696 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description No end command PLC end command is missing (PLEd) Action and Reset The “End” command is missing until the last command is executed, the Action condition PLEd warning shows Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter Check if the program is correct and re-download the program.
Page 697 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PLC MCR error PLC MCR command error (PLCr) Action and Reset The MC command is detected during PLC operation, but there is no Action condition corresponded MCR command, then the PLCr warning shows. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 698 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PLC download fail PLC download fail (PLdF) Action and Reset PLC download fail due to momentary power loss during the downloading, Action condition when power is ON again, PLdF warning shows. Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected Warning setting parameter...
Page 699 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description PLC scan time fail PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable (PLSF) time Action and Reset When the PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable time (400 ms), Action condition PLSF warning shows.
Page 700 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Duplicate MAC ID error ExCom ID fail (ECid) Node address setting error Action and Reset Duplicate setting of MAC ID Action condition Node address setting error Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Correct the setting and cycle the power Reset condition...
Page 701 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom power loss Low voltage of communication card (ECLv) Action and Reset Action condition The 5V power that drive provides to communication card is to low Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Re-power...
Page 702 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom test mode Communication card is in the test mode (ECtt) Action and Reset Action condition Communication card is in the test mode Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Cycle the power and enter the normal mode Reset condition...
Page 703 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description The communication card detects too much errors in ExCom Bus off the BUS, then enters the bus-off status and stop (ECbF) communicating Action and Reset Action condition When the drive detects bus-off (for DeviceNet) Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter...
Page 704 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom no power There is no power supply on the DeviceNet (ECnP) Action and Reset Action condition There is no power supply on the DeviceNet Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Re-power Reset condition...
Page 705 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom factory Factory default setting error defect (ECFF) Action and Reset Action condition Factory default setting error Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Cycle the power Reset condition Record Cause Corrective Actions...
Page 706 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom inner error Serious internal error (ECiF) Action and Reset Action condition Internal memory saving error Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Cycle the power Reset condition Record Cause Corrective Actions...
Page 707 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom Parameter data error Profibus parameter data error (ECPP) Action and Reset Action condition Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record Cause Corrective Actions The GSD file is incorrect Get the correct GSD file from the software 13-58...
Page 708 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom configuration data error Profibus configuration data error (ECPi) Action and Reset Action condition Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record Cause Corrective Actions The GSD file is incorrect Get the correct GSD file from the software 13-59...
Page 709 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Ethernet link fail Ethernet cable is not connected (ECEF) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Record Cause Corrective Actions Ethernet cable is loose...
Page 710 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Communication Communication time-out for communication card time-out and the upper unit (ECto) Action and Reset Action condition Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method CMC-EC01: auto resets when the communication with the upper unit is Reset condition back to normal Record...
Page 711 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Checksum error Checksum error for communication card and the (ECCS) drive Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately resets Record Cause Corrective Actions...
Page 712 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Return defect Communication card returns to the default setting (ECrF) Action and Reset Action condition Communication card returns to the default setting Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately resets Record...
Page 713 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Modbus TCP over Modbus TCP exceeds maximum communication (Eco0) value Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately resets Record Cause...
Page 714 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description EtherNet/IP over Ethernet/IP exceeds maximum communication (ECo1) value Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately resets Record Cause Corrective Actions...
Page 715 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description IP fail (ECiP) IP setting error Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediate reset Record Cause Corrective Actions IP conflict Reset IP...
Page 716 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Mail warning: Alarm mail will be sent when the Mail fail (EC3F) communication card establishes alarm conditions Action and Reset Action condition Communication card establishes alarm conditions Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset...
Page 717 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom busy Communication card busy: too much packets are (ECbY) received Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Record Cause Corrective Actions Communication packets are...
Page 718 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description ExCom card break Communication card break off warning (ECCb) Action and Reset Action condition Communication card break off Action time Warning setting parameter Reset method Auto resets after communication card is re-installed Reset condition Immediately resets Record...
Page 719 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy PLC password error. Copy PLC: password When KPMS-LE01 is processing PLC copy and the error (CPLP) PLC password is incorrect, the CPLP warning occurs. Action and Reset Action level PLC password is incorrect Action time Immediately act...
Page 720 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy PLC: Read Copy PLC Read mode error mode error (CPL0) Action and Reset Action condition When copy PLC read mode with incorrect process Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
Page 721 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy PLC: Write Copy PLC write mode error mode (CPL1) Action and Reset Action condition Copy PLC write mode with incorrect process Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Directly resets...
Page 722 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy PLC version error. Copy PLC: version When a non-MS300 built-in PLC is copied to the error (CPLv) MH300 drive, the CPLv warning occurs. Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately act Warning setting parameter...
Page 723 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy PLC: size error Copy PLC capacity error (CPLS) Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately act Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Directly reset Record Cause Corrective Actions...
Page 724 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy PLC: PLC KPMH-LC01 Copy PLC function must be executed function (CPLF) when PLC is disabled. Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately act Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
Page 725 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description Copy PLC: time-out Copy PLC time-out (CPLt) Action and Reset Action level Software detection Action time Immediately act Warning setting parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Directly reset Record Cause Corrective Actions KPMH-LC01 is removed while...
Page 726 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 ID No. Display Warning Name Description InrCOM time-out Internal communication time-out (ictn) Action and Reset When Pr.09-31= -1 to -8, or -10, and the internal communication Action condition between Master and Slave is abnormal, the ictn warning shows. Action time Immediately acts Warning setting parameter...
Page 727 Chapter 13 Warning Codes|MH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 13-78...
Page 728 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Chapter 14 Fault Codes Summary of Fault Codes ID No. Fault Name ID No. Fault Name No fault record cc hardware failure (Hd0) Over-current during acceleration (ocA) oc hardware error (Hd1) Over-current during deceleration (ocd) Auto-tuning error (AUE) Over-current during steady operation (ocn) PID loss ACI (AFE) Ground fault (GFF)
Page 729 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Fault Name ID No. Fault Name Overload protection at low frequency (oL3) Internal communication error (CP32) Rotor position detection error (RoPd) Internal communicatino error (CP33) CANopen guarding fault (CGdE) Over-torque 3 (ot3) CANopen heartbeat fault (CHbE) Over-torque 4 (ot4) CANopen bus off fault (CbFE) Internal communicatino error (EoL3)
Page 730 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Output current exceeds 3 times of the rated current Over-current during during acceleration. When ocA occurs, the drive acceleration closes the gate of the output immediately, the motor (ocA) runs freely, and the display shows an ocA error. Action and Reset Action condition 300% of the rated current...
Page 731 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Improper parameter settings for the speed tracking function Correct the parameter settings for speed tracking. (including restart after 1. Start the speed tracking function. momentary power loss and 2. Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking. restart after fault) Check the settings for Pr.00-11 control mode: Incorrect combination of control...
Page 732 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Output current exceeds 3 times of the rated current Over-current during during deceleration. When ocd occurs, the drive deceleration closes the gate of the output immediately, the motor (ocd) runs freely, and the display shows an ocd error. Action and Reset Action condition 300% of the rated current...
Page 733 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 The length of motor cable is too Increase the AC motor drive’s capacity. long. Install AC reactor(s) on the output side (U/V/W). The ocd occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive.
Page 734 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Output current exceeds 3 times of the rated current Over-current during during constant speed. When ocn occurs, the drive steady operation closes the gate of the output immediately, the motor (ocn) runs freely, and the display shows an ocn error.
Page 735 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When the drive detects grounding short circuit on Ground fault the output terminals (U/V/W), the drive closes the (GFF) gate of the output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the display shows a GFF error. Action and Reset Action condition Action time...
Page 736 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description IGBT short circuit between upper Short-circuit is detected between upper bridge and bridge and lower lower bridge of the IGBT module bridge (occ) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware protection Action time Act immediately Fault treatment parameter...
Page 737 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Over-current or hardware failure in current Over-current at stop detection at stop. Cycle the power after ocS (ocS) occurs. If the hardware failure occurs, the display shows cd1, cd2 or cd3. Action and Reset Action condition 240% of the rated current...
Page 738 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description DC bus over-voltage during acceleration. When Over-voltage during ovA occurs, the drive closes the gate of the output, acceleration the motor runs freely, and the display shows an ovA (ovA) error.
Page 739 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description DC bus over-voltage during deceleration. When Over-voltage during ovd occurs, the drive closes the gate of the output, deceleration the motor runs freely, and the display shows an ovd (ovd) error.
Page 740 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description DC bus over-voltage at constant speed. When ovn Over-voltage at occurs, the drive closes the gate of the output, constant speed motor runs freely, and the display shows an ovn (ovn) error.
Page 741 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Over-voltage at stop Over-voltage at stop (ovS) Action and Reset 230V series: 410 V Action condition 460V series: 820 V Action time Immediately act when DC bus voltage is higher than the level. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset...
Page 742 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Low-voltage during DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting value acceleration during acceleration. (LvA) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-00 (Default = depending on the model) Action time Immediately act when DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset...
Page 743 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Low-voltage during DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting deceleration value during deceleration. (Lvd) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-00 (Default = depending on the model) Action time Immediate activate when DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset...
Page 744 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Low-voltage at DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting value constant speed at constant speed. (Lvn) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-00 (Default = depending on the model) Action time Immediately act when DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00.
Page 745 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description 1. DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting Low-voltage at stop value at stop. (LvS) 2. Hardware failure in voltage detection. Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-00 (Default = depending on the model) Action time Immediately act when DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00.
Page 746 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Phase loss Phase loss of power input protection (orP) Action and Reset When DC bus ripple is higher than the protection level, and the output Action condition current exceeds 50% of the rated current, the drive starts counting. When the counting value reaches the upper limit, an orP error occurs.
Page 747 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description IGBT overheating IGBT temperature exceeds the protection level. (oH1) Action and Reset Depending on the model power, refer to Table 1 below. When the setting for Pr.06-15 is higher than the oH1 level, oH1 error Action condition occurs instead of oH1 warning.
Page 748 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Over-heat key The drive has detected the key components are components (oH2) over heat Action and Reset Action condition Refer to the table below for oH2 level of each models The oH2 fault occurs when the temperature sensor of key components Action time detects the temperature is higher than the protection level for 100ms.
Page 749 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Model oH warning Voltage oH2 (ºC) oH1 (ºC) oH1 warning = Pr.06-15 (ºC) (NOTE: x＝A orE) VFD1A6MH23x□□A□ VFD2A8MH23x□□A□ VFD5A0MH23x□□A□ VFD7A5MH23x□□A□ VFD11AMH23x□□A□ VFD17AMH23x□□A□ Three-phase VFD25AMH23x□□A□ VFD33AMH23x□□A□ _230V VFD49AMH23x□□A□ VFD65AMH23x□□A□ VFD75AMH23x□□A□ VFD90AMH23x□□A□ VFD120MH23x□□A□ VFD146MH23x□□A□ VFD1A5MH43x□□A□ oH1 warning = oH1 – 5 VFD3A0MH43x□□A□...
Page 750 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description IGBT temperature detection failure IGBT hardware failure in temperature detection (tH1o) Action and Reset Action condition NTC broken or wiring failure When the IGBT temperature is higher than the protection level, and Action time detection time exceeds 100 ms, the tH1o protection activates.
Page 751 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Capacitor hardware fault Hardware failure in capacitor temperature detection (tH2o) Action and Reset Action condition NTC broken or wiring failure When the IGBT temperature is higher than the protection level, and Action time detection time exceeds 100ms, the tH2o protection occurs.
Page 752 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current. Overload capacity: Normal duty:  Sustains for one minute when the drive outputs 120% of the drive’s rated output current. Overload Sustains for three seconds when the drive (oL) outputs 150% of the drive’s rated output current.
Page 753 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Improper parameter settings for the speed tracking function Correct the parameter settings for speed tracking. (including restart after 1. Start the speed tracking function. momentary power loss and 2. Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking. restart after fault) 14-26...
Page 754 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Electronic thermal Electronic thermal relay 1 protection. The drive relay 1 protection coasts to stop once it activates. (EoL1) Action and Reset Action condition Start counting when output current > 150% of motor 1 rated current. Pr.06-14 (if the output current is larger than 105% of motor 1 rated current Action time again within 60 sec., the counting time reduces and is less than Pr.06-...
Page 755 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Torque compensation is too Adjust the torque compensation (refer to Pr.07-26 torque compensation large. gain) until the current reduces and the motor does no stall. Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan. Unbalanced three-phase Replace the motor.
Page 756 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Electronic thermal Electronic thermal relay 2 protection. The drive relay 2 protection coasts to stop once it activates. (EoL2) Action and Reset Start counting when the output current > 150% of the motor 2 rated Action condition current Pr.06-28 (If the output current is larger than 105% of the motor 2 rated...
Page 757 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Torque compensation is too Adjust the torque compensation (refer to Pr.07-71 torque compensation large gain) until the current reduces and the motor does no stall. Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan. Unbalanced three-phase Replace the motor.
Page 758 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Motor overheating (PTC) (Pr.03-00–Pr.03-01=6 Motor overheating 24_1 PTC), when PTC input > Pr.06-30, the fault (oH3) PTC treatment acts according to Pr.06-29. Action and Reset Action condition PTC input value > Pr.06-30 setting (Default = 50%) Action time Immediately act Pr.06-29...
Page 759 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Check if the setting for stall Set the stall prevention to the proper value. prevention is correct. Unbalanced three-phase Replace the motor. impedance of the motor Harmonics are too high. Use remedies to reduce harmonics. 14-32...
Page 760 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Motor overheating (PT100) (Pr.03-00–Pr.03- Motor overheating 01=11 PT100). When PT100 input > Pr.06-57 24_2 (oH3) PT100 (default = 7 V), the fault treatment acts according to Pr.06-29. Action and Reset Action condition PT100 input value >...
Page 761 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Check if the setting for stall Set the stall prevention to the proper value. prevention is correct. Unbalanced three-phase Replace the motor. impedance of the motor Harmonics are too high Use remedies to reduce harmonics. 14-34...
Page 762 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When output current exceeds the over-torque Over-torque 1 detection level (Pr.06-07) and exceeds over-torque (ot1) detection time (Pr.06-08), and when Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09 is set to 2 or 4, the ot1 error displays. Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-07...
Page 763 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Improper parameter settings for speed tracking function Correct the parameter settings for speed tracking. (including restart after Start the speed tracking function. momentary power loss and Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking. restart after fault) 14-36...
Page 764 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When the output current exceeds the over-torque Over torque 2 detection level (Pr.06-10) and exceeds over- (ot2) torque detection time (Pr.06-11), and when Pr.06- 09 is set to 2 or 4, the ot2 error displays. Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-10...
Page 765 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Improper parameter settings for speed tracking function Correct the parameter settings for speed tracking. (including restart at momentary Start the speed tracking function. power loss and restart after Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking. fault) 14-38...
Page 766 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Under current Low current detection (uC) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-71 Action time Pr.06-72 Pr.06-73 0: No function Fault treatment parameter 1: warn and coast to stop 2: warn and ramp to stop by the 2 deceleration time 3: warn and continue operation When Pr.06-73=3, uC is a “Warning”.
Page 767 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description This code occurs when the motor drive is running under speed mode (not IMFOCPG / PMFOCPG) Limit Error (LiT) and the negative running limit or the positive running limit of the MI terminals is enabled. Action and Reset When under the speed mode (not FOCPG), negative running limit or Action condition...
Page 768 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description EEPROM read error Internal EEPROM cannot be read. (cF2) Action and Reset Action condition Firmware internal detection Action time cF2 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
Page 769 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description U-phase error U-phase current detection error when power is ON. (cd1) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time cd1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Power-off Reset condition...
Page 770 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description V-phase error V-phase current detection error when power is ON. (cd2) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time cd2 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Power-off Reset condition...
Page 771 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description W-phase error W-phase current detection error when power is ON. (cd3) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time cd3 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Power-off Reset condition...
Page 772 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description cc Hardware failure cc (current clamp) hardware protection error when (Hd0) power is ON. Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Hd0 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Power-off...
Page 773 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Oc Hardware failure oc hardware protection error when power is ON. (Hd1) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Hd1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault. Fault treatment parameter Reset method Power-off...
Page 774 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Auto-tuning error Motor auto-tuning error (AUE) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record Cause Corrective Actions Press STOP key during auto- Re-execute auto-tuning.
Page 775 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description PID loss ACI PID feedback loss (analog feedback signal is only (AFE) valid when the PID function is enabled.) Action and Reset Action condition When the analog input < 4 mA (only detects 4–20 mA analog input) Action time Pr.08-08 Pr.08-09...
Page 776 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description PG feedback error The motor runs in a reverse direction to the (PGF1) frequency command direction. Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Pr. 10-09 Pr. 10-08 0: Warn and keep operation Fault treatment parameter 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2: Fault and coast to stop...
Page 777 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description PG feedback loss Pr. 10-00 and Pr. 10-02 is not set in the PG control (PGF2) mode. When press “RUN” key, PGF2 fault occurs. Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Act immediately Fault treatment parameter...
Page 778 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Under PG mode, when the motor frequency exceeds the encoder observer stall level (Pr. 10- PG feedback stall 10) and starts to count, the fault time is longer (GF3) than the detection time of encoder observer stall (Pr.
Page 779 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Under PG mode, when the motor frequency exceeds encoder observer slip range (Pr. 10-13) PG slip error and starts to count, the fault time is longer than (PGF4) the detection time of encoder observer slip (Pr. 10- 14), PGF4 fault occurs.
Page 780 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description ACI loss Analog input loss (including all the 4–20 mA analog (ACE) signal) Action and Reset Action condition When the analog input is < 4 mA (only detects 4–20 mA analog input) Action time Immediately act Pr.03-19...
Page 781 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description External fault. When the drive decelerates based External fault on the setting of Pr.07-20, the EF fault displays on (EF) the keypad Action and Reset Action condition MI=EF and the MI terminal is ON. Action time Immediately act Pr.07-20...
Page 782 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When the contact of MIx = EF1 is ON, the output Emergency stop stops immediately and displays EF1 on the keypad. (EF1) The motor is in free running. Action and Reset Action condition MIx=EF1 and the MI terminal is ON Action time...
Page 783 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When the contact of MI=bb is ON, the output stops External base block immediately and displays bb on the keypad. The (bb) motor is in free running. Action and Reset Action condition MI=bb and the MI terminal is ON.
Page 784 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Password is locked Entering the wrong password three consecutive (Pcod) times Action and Reset Action condition Entering the wrong password three consecutive times Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
Page 785 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Illegal command Communication command is illegal (CE1) Action and Reset Action condition When the function code is not 03, 06, 10, or 63. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
Page 786 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Illegal data address Data address is illegal. (CE2) Action and Reset Action condition When the data address is correct. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record...
Page 787 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Illegal data value Data value is illegal. (CE3) Action and Reset Action condition When the data length is too long. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record...
Page 788 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Data is written to read-only address Data is written to read-only address. (CE4) Action and Reset Action condition When the data is written to read-only address. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset...
Page 789 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Modbus transmission time- Modbus transmission time-out occurs. (CE10) Action and Reset When the communication time exceeds the detection time for Pr.09-03 Action condition time-out. Action time Pr.09-03 Pr.09-02 0: Warn and continue operation Fault treatment parameter 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2: Warn and coast to stop...
Page 790 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Y-connection / Δ-connection A fault occurs when Y-Δ switches switch fault (ydc) Action and Reset 1. ydc occurs when the confirmation signals of Y-connection and Δ- connection are conducted at the same time. Action condition 2.
Page 791 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When Pr. 07-13 is not 0, and the power is suddenly Deceleration energy off, causing the DC bus voltage lower than the dEb backup fault action level, the dEb function acts and the motor (dEb) ramps to stop.
Page 792 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description On the basis of the maximum slip limit set via Pr. 10-29, the speed deviation is abnormal. When the motor drive outputs at constant speed, F>H or F<H Over slip error (oSL) exceeds the level set via Pr.
Page 793 Choose the correct setting of Pr. 10-00 is incorrect If the motor selection switch of Check if it is the UVW encoder or Delta encoder PG card on the correct position PG card selection is incorrect Install the correct PG card...
Page 794 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description STO Loss 1 S1–DCM internal loop detection error (STL1) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Hardware failure, and cannot reset. Cycle the power. Reset condition Record Cause...
Page 795 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Safety Torque Off function active (STo) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter When Pr.06-44=1 and after STo error is cleared, it automatically Auto resets.
Page 796 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description STO Loss 2 S2–DCM internal loop detection error (STL2) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Hardware failure, and cannot reset. Cycle the power. Reset condition Record Cause...
Page 797 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description STO Loss 3 S1–DCM and S2–DCM internal loop detection error (STL3) Action and Reset Action condition Hardware detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Hardware failure, and cannot reset. Cycle the power. Reset condition Record Cause...
Page 798 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description U-phase short circuit U-phase short circuit detected when output wiring (Aoc) detection is performed before the drive runs. Action and Reset Action condition 300% of the rated current Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method...
Page 799 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description V-phase short circuit V-phase short circuit detected when output wiring (Boc) detection is performed before the drive runs. Action and Reset Action condition 300% of the rated current Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method...
Page 800 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description W-phase short circuit W-phase short circuit detected when output wiring (Coc) detection is performed before the drive runs. Action and Reset Action condition 300% of the rated current Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method...
Page 801 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Output phase loss U phase output phase loss U phase (oPL1) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-47 Pr.06-46 Action time Pr.06-48: Use the setting value of Pr.06-48 first. If DC braking function activates, use that of Pr.06-46.
Page 802 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Output phase loss V phase output phase loss V phase (oPL2) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-47 Pr.06-46 Action time Pr.06-48: Use the setting value of Pr.06-48 first. If DC braking function activates, use that of Pr.06-46.
Page 803 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Output phase loss W phase W phase output phase loss (oPL3) Action and Reset Action condition Pr.06-47 Pr.06-46 Action time Pr.06-48: Use the setting value of Pr.06-48 first. If DC braking function activates, use that of Pr.06-46..
Page 804 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Overload protection at low frequency Low frequency and high current protection (oL3) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record...
Page 805 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Rotor position detection error Rotor position detection error protection (roPd) Action and Reset Action condition Reset the software. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record Cause...
Page 806 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description CANopen guarding CANopen guarding fault fault (CGdE) Action and Reset When CANopen Node Guarding detects that one of the slaves is not Action condition responding, the CGdE fault occurs. The upper unit sets factor and time during configuration. Action time The time that upper unit sets during configuration Fault treatment parameter...
Page 807 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description CANopen heartbeat CANopen heartbeat fault fault (CHbE) Action and Reset When CANopen Heartbeat detects that one of the slaves is not responding, Action condition the CHbE fault occurs. The upper unit sets the confirming time of producer and consumer during configuration.
Page 808 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description CANopen bus off CANopen bus off fault fault (CbFE) Action and Reset Hardwar When CANopen card is not installed, CbFE fault occurs. When the master received wrong communication package, Action condition CbFE fault occurs.
Page 809 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description CANopen index error CANopen index error (CIdE) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Act immediately Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault Record Cause Corrective Actions...
Page 810 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description CANopen station CANopen station address error (only supports 1 – address error 127) (CAdE) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Act immediately Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset (Pr.00-02=7) Reset condition Record...
Page 811 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description CANopen memory CANopen memory error error (CFrE) Action and Reset When the user update firmware version of the control board, but the Action condition FRAM internal data remains the same, then CFrE fault occurs. Action time Act immediately Fault treatment parameter...
Page 812 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description InrCOM time-out Internal communication time-out error (ictE) Action and Reset Pr.09-31=-1 ~ -10 (there is no -9), when the internal communication Action condition between Slave and Master is abnormal, IctE fault occurs. Action time Act immediately Fault treatment parameter...
Page 813 Fault Name Description Internal communication error Internal communication time-out (CP20) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Record Cause Corrective Actions Internal communication error Contact your local distributor or Delta. 14-86...
Page 814 Fault Name Description Internal communication error Abnormal internal communication (CP22) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Record Cause Corrective Actions Internal communication error Contact your local distributor or Delta. 14-87...
Page 815 Fault Name Description Internal communication error Abnormal internal communication (CP30) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Record Cause Corrective Actions Internal communication error Contact your local distributor or Delta. 14-88...
Page 816 Fault Name Description Internal communication error Abnormal internal communication (CP32) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Record Cause Corrective Actions Internal communication error Contact your local distributor or Delta. 14-89...
Page 817 Fault Name Description Internal communication error Abnormal internal communication (CP33) Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Record Cause Corrective Actions Internal communication error Contact your local distributor or Delta. 14-90...
Page 818 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When the output current exceeds the over-torque Over-torque 3 detection level (Pr.14-75) and exceeds over- (ot3) torque detection time (Pr.14-76), and when Pr.14- 74 is set to 2 or 4, the ot3 error displays. Action and Reset Action condition Pr.14-75...
Page 819 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description When the output current exceeds the over-torque Over-torque 4 detection level (Pr.14-78) and exceeds over- (ot4) torque detection time (Pr.14-79), and when Pr.14- 77 is set to 2 or 4, the ot4 error displays. Action and Reset Action condition Pr.14-78...
Page 820 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Improper parameter settings for speed tracking function 1. Correct the parameter settings for speed tracking. (including restart after 2. Start the speed tracking function. momentary power loss and 3. Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking. restart after fault) 14-93...
Page 821 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Internal Electronic thermal relay 3 protection. The drive communication error coasts to stop once it activates. (EoL3) Action and Reset Action condition Start counting when output current > 105% of the motor 3 rated current. Pr.14-81 (If the output current is larger than 105% of the motor 3 rated Action time current again within 60 sec., the counting time reduces and is less than...
Page 822 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan. Unbalanced three-phase Replace the motor. impedance of the motor 14-95...
Page 823 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Internal Electronic thermal relay 4 protection. The drive communication error coasts to stop once it activates. (EoL4) Action and Reset Start counting when the output current > 105% of the motor 4 rated Action condition current.
Page 824 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan. Unbalanced three-phase Replace the motor. impedance of the motor 14-97...
Page 825 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description GFF detected The ground current short circuit detected when when power is on power is on. (Hd6) Action and Reset Action condition Reset the software. Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition...
Page 826 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description GFF occurs before The ground short circuit detected when output running wiring detection is performed before the drive runs. (b4GFF) Action and Reset Action condition 250% of the rated current Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter...
Page 827 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Auto-tune error 1 No feedback current error when motor parameter (AUE1) automatically detects. Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record...
Page 828 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Auto-tune error 2 Motor phase loss error when motor parameter (AUE2) automatically detects. Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset Record...
Page 829 Chapter 14 Fault CodesMH300 ID No. Display Fault Name Description Auto-tune error 3 No load current I measurement error when motor (AUE3) parameter automatically detects. Action and Reset Action condition Software detection Action time Immediately act Fault treatment parameter Reset method Manual reset Reset condition Immediately reset...
Page 830 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Chapter 15 CANopen Overview 15-1 CANopen Overview 15-2 Wiring for CANopen 15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Descreptions 15-4 CANopen Supporting Index 15-5 CANopen Fault Codes 15-6 CANopen LED Functions 15-1...
Page 831 Supports default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02; Supports SYNC service; Supports Emergency service. NMT (Network Management):  Supports NMT module control; Supports NMT Error control; Supports Boot-up. Delta CANopen does not support this service: Time Stamp service  15-2...
Page 832 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 15-1 CANopen Overview CANopen Protocol CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine control networks such as handling systems. Version 4.02 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover the application layer and communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).
Page 833 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 NMT (Network Management Object) The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. A network has only one NMT master, and the other nodes are slaves. All CANopen nodes have a present NMT state, and the NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The following shows the state diagram of a node: (1) After power is applied, start in the auto-initialization state A: NMT...
Page 834 There is no data limit for SDOs to transfer data, but it must transfer data by segment when the data exceeds four bytes with an end signal in the last segment. MH300 series does not support segmented transmission at the moment.
Page 835 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR. Type number 254: Delta CANopen does not support this transmission format. Type number 255 indicates the data is an asynchronous aperiodic transmission. All PDO transmission data must be mapped to the index with Object Dictionary.
Page 836 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 15-2 Wiring for CANopen Use an external CANopen communication splitter box (TAP-CN03) for built-in CANopen wiring to connect CANopen to an MH300. The link uses an RJ45 cable. You must terminate the two farthest ends with 120 Ω terminating resistors as shown in the picture below. *1.
Page 837 There are two control modes for CANopen: the DS402 standard (Pr.09-40 set to 1) is the default, and the Delta’s standard setting (Pr.09-40 set to 0). There are two control modes according to Delta’s standard. One is the old control mode (Pr.09-30 = 0); this control mode can only control the motor drive under frequency control.
Page 838 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 15-3-2 DS402 Standard Control Mode 15-3-2-1 Related set up for an AC motor drive (following the DS402 standard) If you want to use the DS402 standard to control the motor drive, follow these steps: 1. Wire the hardware (refer to Section 15-2 Wiring for CANopen). 2.
Page 839 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 When the motor drive turns on and finishes the initiation, it remains in Ready to Switch On status. To control the operation of the motor drive, change to Operation Enable status. To do this, set the control word’s bit0–bit3 and bit7 of the Index 6040H and pair with Index Status Word (Status Word 0X6041).
Page 840 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Set command 6040 = 0xE, and then set another command 6040 = 0xF. Then you can switch the motor drive to Operation Enable. The Index 605A determines the direction of the lines from Operation Enable when the control mode changes from Quick Stop Active. When the setting value is 5–7, both direction lines are active, but when the setting value of 605A is not 5–7, once the motor drive is switched to Quick Stop Active, it is not able to switch back to Operation Enable.
Page 841 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 NOTE: 1. Read 6043 to get the current rotation speed (unit: rpm). 2. Read bit 10 of 6041 to find if the rotation speed has reached the targeting value (0: Not reached; 1: Reached). 15-12...
Page 842 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Torque mode: 1. Set AC motor drive to the torque mode: set index 6060 = 4. (index 6042 is available for speed limit under the torque control mode) 2. Switch to Operation Enable mode: set 6040 = 0xE, and then set 6040 = 0xF. 3.
Page 843 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Position mode Set the parameter of a trapezium curve to define position control (Pr.11-43 Max. Frequency of Point-to-Point Position Control, Pr.11-44 Accel. Time of Point-to-Point Position Control and Pr.11- 45 Decel. Time of Point-to-Point Position Control) Set MH300 to position control mode: set Index 6060 = 1.
Page 844 Set the frequency source: set Pr.00-20 to 6. Choose the source for the Frequency command from the CANopen setting. Set Delta Standard (Old definition, only supports speed mode) as the control mode: Pr.09-40 = 0 and Pr.09-30 = 0. Set the CANopen station: set Pr.09-36; the range is between 1–127. When Pr.09-36 = 0, the CANopen slave function is disabled.
Page 845 Set the position source: set Pr.11-40 = 3. Choose the source of the Position Command from CANopen setting.) Set Delta Standard (New definition) as the control mode: Pr.09-40 = 0 and 09-30 = 1. Set the CANopen station: set Pr.09-36; the range is between 1–127. When Pr.09-36 = 0, the CANopen slave function is disabled.
Page 846 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Torque mode: 1. Set MH300 to speed control mode: set index 6060 to 4. 2. Set the target torque: set 2060-07 unit as %, and the value is one decimal place. 100 represents 10.0%. 3. Operation: set 2060-01 = 0080H starts excitation, and the drive immediately runs at the target torque. NOTE: 1.
Page 847 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Position Mode Set the parameter of a trapezium curve to define position control (Pr.11-43 Max. Position Control Frequency), Pr.11-44 Accel. Time of Position Control, Pr.11-45 Decel. Time of Position Control) Set MH300 to position control mode, set Index 6060 = 1. Set 2060-01 = 0080h, then motor drive starts excitation.
Page 848 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 15-3-5 DI / DO / AI / AO are Controlled through CANopen To control the DO AO of the motor drive through CANopen, follow these steps: 1. Define the DO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr.02-13 = 50 to control RY1. 2.
Page 849 Pr. Number 10 (0AH) 15 (0FH) Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H MH300 Control Index: Delta Standard Mode (Old Definition) Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Note 0 Number 00B: Disable 01B: Stop bit 1–0...
Page 850 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Note 1: Enable the function of bit 12 bit 6-11 00B: No function 01B: Operation command by the digital keypad 10B: Operation command bit 14–13 according to Pr.00-21 setting 2020H 11B: Switch the source of operation command bit 15...
Page 851 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Note When the current is greater than 655.35, it automatically uses a decimal 5 Output current (XXX.XX A) point (XXX.X A). Decimal places can refer to the high byte of 2021-20. 6 DC BUS voltage (XXX.X V) 7 Output voltage (XXX.X V) The current segment is run...
Page 852 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Note Display PID feedback value after enabling the PID function in % (XXX.XX%) Display signal for AVI analog input terminal, 0–10 V corresponds to 0–100% (to two decimal places) Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4–20 mA/0–10 V corresponds to 0-100% (to two decimal places)
Page 853 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Note 20 Output the value of Pr.00-05 Number of motor turns when drive operates (Z-phase) 22 Operation position of motor Carrier frequency of the drive (XX kHz) 26 Reserved Status of the drive bit 1–0 00b: No direction 01b: Forward...
Page 854 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 CANopen Remote IO mapping Index Definition Each bit corresponds to different input terminals. Each bit corresponds to different input terminals. 03h–40h Reserved Each bit corresponds to different output terminals. 42h–60h Reserved AVI (%) ACI (%) 2026H Reserved AI10 (%) AI11 (%)
Page 855 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Delta Standard Mode (New Definition) Descriptions Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode bit Definition Priority 00h R 0: Stop Homing 0: fcmd =0 Pulse 1: Position Pulse 1: Return 1: fcmd = Fset(Fpid)
Page 856 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 Descriptions Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode bit Definition Priority Actual position Actual position Actual position Actual position 05h R S32 (absolute) (absolute) (absolute) (absolute) 2061h 06h R 07h R S16 Actual torque Actual torque Actual torque...
Page 857 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 15-5 CANopen Fault Codes The settings are based on Pr.06-17–Pr.06–22 and Pr.14-70–Pr.14-73.  Refer to Chapter 14 for details about the fault codes.  CANopen Fault CANopen Setting* Display Description fault register fault code code (bit 0–7) 0001H Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 2213H...
Page 858 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 CANopen Fault CANopen Setting* Display Description fault register fault code code (bit 0–7) IGBT temperature detection failure 0012H FF00H (tH1o) 0013H Capacitor hardware fault (tH2o) FF01H 0015H Overload (oL) 2310H Electronic thermal relay 1 protection 0016H 2310H (EoL1) Electronic thermal relay 2 protection...
Page 859 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 CANopen Fault CANopen Setting* Display Description fault register fault code code (bit 0–7) 002BH PG feedback loss (PGF2) 7301H 002CH PG feedback stall (GF3) 7301H 002DH PG slip error (PGF4) 7301H 0030H ACI loss (ACE) FF25H 0031H External fault (EF) 9000H...
Page 860 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 CANopen Fault CANopen Setting* Display Description fault register fault code code (bit 0–7) 004DH STO Loss 2 (STL2) FF32H 004EH STO Loss 3 (STL3) FF33H 0050H U-phase short circuit (Aoc) FF2BH 0051H V-phase short circuit (Boc) FF2CH 0050H W-phase short circuit (Coc)
Page 861 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 CANopen Fault CANopen Setting* Display Description fault register fault code code (bit 0–7) Internal communication error 007DH FF39H (CP30) Internal communication error 0080H FF3BH (CP32) Internal communication error 0081H FF3CH (CP33) Over-torque 3 0082H 2310H (ot3) 0083H Over-torque 4 (ot4) 2310H 0088H Internal communication error (EoL3)
Page 862 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 15-6 CANopen LED Function There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR. RUN LED: LED status Condition CANopen Status Keep lighting off Initial Blinking Pre-operation Single 1000 Stopped 單次閃爍 flash Keep lighting on Operation ERR LED: LED status Condition / Status No Error...
Page 863 Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMH300 [This page intentionally left blank] 15-34...
Page 864 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Chapter 16 PLC Function Applications 16-1 PLC Summary 16-2 Notes Before Using a PLC 16-3 Turn On 16-4 Basic Principles of PLC Ladder Diagrams 16-5 Various PLC Device Functions 16-6 Introduction to the Command Window 16-7 Display and Treatment of PLC Related Faults and Codes 16-8...
Page 865 16-1-2 WPLSoft ladder diagram editing tool WPLSoft is Delta's software program for the DVP and MH300 programmable controllers in Windows operating system environment. In addition to general PLC program design and general Windows editing functions (such as cut, paste, copy, and multiple windows), WPLSoft also provides many features such as Chinese/English annotation editing, registry editing, settings, file reading, saving, and contact graphic monitoring and settings.
Page 866 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-2 Notes Before Using a PLC The MH300 provides two communication serial ports that you can use to download programs to the PLC (see Figure 16-1 below).  Channel 1 (USB port) communication format is the same as channel 2. ...
Page 867 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 When you set Pr.00-04 to 28, the displayed value is the value of PLC register D1043, as shown below. Figure 16-2 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) Can display 0–65535 In the PLC Run and PLC Stop mode, you cannot set Pr.00-02 to the values 9 or 10, and cannot be reset to the default value.
Page 868 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-3 Turn On 16-3-1 Connect the Drive to the PC You start operating the PLC functions with the following steps: After pressing the MENU key and choosing 4: PLC on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad (optional), press the ENTER key (see Figure 16-3 below).
Page 869 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Digital keypad (KPMH-LC01) Enter PLC mode setting, and select PLC1 STOP PLC 0: Do not implement PLC functions PLC 1: Initiate PLC Run PLC 2: Initiate PLC Stop Figure 16-6 The MH300 automatically switches to PLC mode when the external multifunctional input terminals (MI1–MI7) are in PLC Mode selection bit 0 (51) or PLC Mode selection bit1 (52), and the terminal contact is closed or open.
Page 870 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-3-2 I/O device explanation Input devices: Serial MI10 MI11 MI12 1: Control I/O 2: Expansion card EMM-D33A (D1022=10) Output devices: Serial MO1 MO2 MO10 MO11 MO12 RY10 RY11 RY10 RY11 RY12 1: Control I/O | 2: Expansion card EMM-D33A (D1022=10) 3: Expansion card EMM-R2CA (D1022=12) 4: Expansion card EMM-R3AA (D1022=13)
Page 871 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-3-3 Installing WPLSoft See Delta’s website where you can download the WPLSoft editing software: After you install WPLSoft, the WPLSoft program is located in the folder “C:\Program Files\Delta Industrial Automation\WPLSoft x.xx”. 16-3-4 Writing programs in WPLSoft STEP 1: You can run the editing software by double-clicking the WPL icon.
Page 872 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Figure 16-10 STEP 3: To open a new project file, on the Toolbar, click the New button (or press Ctrl+N). Figure 16-11 NOTE: Alternatively, on the File menu, click New (Ctrl+N). Figure 16-12 16-9...
Page 873 In the Communication Setting dialog box, define the communication settings and then click OK. Figure 16-14 NOTE: You must select RS232 for the type of connection setup in the Communication Setting dialog box when using USB to connect the motor drive (MS300 / MH300 series). 16-10...
Page 874 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 STEP 5: You can then begin editing the program. There are two program editing methods: you can edit in the command mode, or edit in the ladder diagram mode. Figure 16-15 NOTE: In the ladder diagram mode, you use the buttons on the function icon row on the toolbar. Figure 16-16 16-11...
Page 875 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Basic Operation Example: Create the ladder diagram in the following picture. Figure 16-17 Use the following steps to create the ladder diagram. These steps show you how to use both the mouse and the keyboard (F1–F12) to add functions. 1.
Page 876 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 In the Input Device Instruction dialog box, select the device name (such as M), device number (such as 10) and enter comments (such as auxiliary coil). Click OK when finished. Figure 16-20 3. Add an output coil. Click the output coil button or press F7.
Page 877 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Figure 16-22 4. Press Enter, and Input Instruction box appears. In the Input Instruction box, select END, or use the keyboard to type “END”, and then click OK, as shown in Figure 16-23 and Figure 16-24. Figure 16-23 Figure 16-24 5.
Page 878 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Figure 16-25 16-3-5 Program download After you compile your program, download it to the device. Click the Download button . WPLSoft downloads the program to the online PLC in the communication format that you specified for the communication settings.
Page 879 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-4 Basic Principles of PLC Ladder Diagrams 16-4-1 Schematic diagram for PLC ladder diagram program scanning Output results are calculated on the basis of the ladder diagram configuration Repeated (internal devices have real-time program scans output before results are sent to an external output point) Figure 16-27...
Page 880 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 The various internal devices in a PLC use a certain amount of memory in the PLC’s storage area. When you use these devices, the content of the corresponding storage area is read in the form of bits, bytes, or words.
Page 881 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Device Description of Function Type Counters perform counting operations. The setting value for a counter (such as the number of pulses to be counted) must be assigned when a counter is used. A counter contains a coil, contact, and a counting storage device.
Page 882 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Ladder diagram Explanation of commands Command Using Device structures Parallel N.O. X, Y, M, T, C Parallel N.C. X, Y, M, T, C Rising edge-triggered switch X, Y, M, T, C Falling edge-triggered switch X, Y, M, T, C Rising edge-triggered series ANDP X, Y, M, T, C...
Page 883 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-4-3 Overview of PLC ladder diagram editing The program editing method in WPLSoft begins from the left busbar and proceeds to the right busbar (the right busbar is not visible in WPLSoft). Continue to the next row after completing each row; there are a maximum of 11 contacts on each row.
Page 884 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Explanation of basic structure of ladder diagrams LD (LDI) command: an LD or LDI command appears at the start of a block. See Figure 16-30. LD command LD command AND Block OR Block Figure 16-30 LDP and LDF use this command structure, but there are differences in their action state.
Page 885 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ANB command: a configuration in which one block is in series with one device or block. See Figure 16-34. ANB command Figure 16-34 ORB command: a configuration in which one block is in parallel with one device or block. See Figure 16-35.
Page 886 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 compiling program may sometimes omit identical state output, as shown in Figure 16-36. Figure 16-36 16-4-4 Common basic program design examples Start, stop, and protection circuits Some applications may require a brief close or brief break using a button to start and stop equipment. A protective circuit must therefore be designed to maintain continued operation in these situations.
Page 887 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Example 3: Setting (SET) and reset (RST) command protective circuit Figure 16-39 shows a protective circuit composed of RST and SET commands. A priority stop occurs when you place the RST command after the SET command. ...
Page 888 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ladder diagram program is scanned from the top down, it is impossible for Y1 and Y2 to actuate at same time. This ladder diagram assigns priority only to Y1. Figure 16-41 Example 6: Sequence control If the N.C.
Page 889 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Oscillating circuit with a period of nT+ΔT The ladder diagram (Figure 16-44) shown below uses timer T0 to control coil Y1’s electrified time. After Y1 is electrified, it causes timer T0 to close during the next scanning cycle, which causes the output from Y1 to oscillate as shown in the diagram below.
Page 890 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Example 10: Delay circuit When input X0 is ON, because the corresponding NC contact is OFF, the timer T10 is in a no power state, and output coil Y1 is electrified. T10 receives power and begins to count the time only after input X0 is OFF, and output coil Y1 is delayed for 100 seconds (K1000*0.1 sec.
Page 891 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-5 Various PLC Device Functions Item Specifications Notes Algorithmic control The program is stored internally, alternating back-and-forth method scanning method. Input/output control When the scan starts again after ending (after execution to the method END command), the input / output is immediately refreshed. Algorithmic Application command (1 Basic commands (several μs)
Page 892 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-5-1 Introduction to device functions Input / output contact functions Input contact X has this function: input contact X is connected with an input device, and reads input signals entering the PLC. There are no restrictions on the number of times that the input contact A or B appear in the program.
Page 893 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 The following diagram shows the relationship between bits, digits, nibbles, words, and double words in a binary system (see Figure 16-51). Double Word Word Byte Nibble Figure 16-51 Octal Number, OCT The external input and output terminals of a DVP-PLC are numbered using octal numbers. Example: External input: X0–X7, X10–X17…(Device number table) External output:...
Page 894 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Functions of auxiliary relays Like an output relay Y, an auxiliary relay M has an output coil and contacts A and B, and you can use the output relay contacts any number of times in a program. You can use an auxiliary relay M to configure the control circuit, but cannot use the auxiliary relay to directly drive an external load.
Page 895 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Example RST C0 C0 K5 Figure 16-52 1. When X0 = ON and the RST command is executed, the current value of C0 reverts to 0, and the output contact reverts to OFF. 2. When X1 switches from OFF to ON, the settings current value of the counter is incremented present...
Page 896 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-5-2 Introduction to special relay functions (special M) R/W column: RO means read only; RW means read and write. Special M Function Descriptions Monitors N.O. contact (contact A). N.O. while RUN, contact A. This contact is M1000 ON while in the RUN state.
Page 897 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Special M Function Descriptions M1032 M1033 M1034 M1035 M1036 M1037 M1038 MI7 single-phase or MI6+MI7 AB-phase count begins M1039 Reset MI7 single-phase or MI6+MI7 AB-phase count value M1040 Hardware power (Servo On) M1041 M1042 Quick Stop M1043 M1044 Pause (Halt)
Page 898 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Special M Function Descriptions M1086 485 data receives a request M1090 OFF (Refer to Pr.00-29 for more information) M1091 HAND (Refer to Pr.00-29 for more information) M1092 AUTO (Refer to Pr.00-29 for more information) M1100 LOCAL (Refer to Pr.00-29 for more information) M1101 REMOTE (Refer to Pr.00-29 for more information)
Page 899 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-5-3 Introduction to special register functions (special D) R/W column: RO means read only; RW means read and write. Special D Function Descriptions D1000 D1001 Device system program version D1002 Program capacity D1003 Total program memory content D1004 –...
Page 900 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Special D Function Descriptions D1032 AI11 value (0.00–100.00%) D1033 – D1034 D1035 D1036 Servo error bit D1037 Drive output frequency D1038 DC bus voltage D1039 Output voltage D1040 Analog output value AFM (-100.00–100.00%) D1041 Analog output value AO10 (0.00–100.00%) D1042 Analog output value AO11 (0.00–100.00%) Can be user-defined (is displayed on panel when Pr.00-04 is set to 28;...
Page 901 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Special D Function Descriptions D1101 Target frequency (must be operating) D1102 Reference frequency D1103 D1104 D1105 Target torque D1106 D1107 π (Pi) low word D1108 π (Pi) high word D1109 Random number D1111 Encoder pulse number L D1112 Encoder pulse number H D1600...
Page 902 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Power Special D Description of Function Default Memory D1095 – Reserved D1096 Corresponding real-time transmission type (PDO) D1097 – Setting range: 1 Corresponding real-time receiving type (PDO) D1098 – Setting range: 1 Initialization completion delay time D1099 15 sec.
Page 903 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-6 Introduction to the Command Window 16-6-1 Overview of basic commands Ordinary commands  Execution Command Function OPERAND code speed (µs) Load contact A X, Y, M, T, C Load contact B X, Y, M, T, C X, Y, M, T, C Connect contact in series...
Page 904 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Upper/lower differential output commands  Execution Command Function OPERAND code speed (µs) Upper differential output Y, M Lower differential output Y, M Table 16-20 Stop command  Command Execution Function OPERAND code speed (µs) Program conclusion Table 16-21 Other commands ...
Page 905 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-6-2 Detailed explanation of basic commands Command Function Load contact A X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand      － Use the LD command for contact A starting at the left busbar or contact A starting at a contact circuit block;...
Page 906 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function Connect contact B in series X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand      － Use the ANI command to create a series connection to contact B; its function is to first read the current status of the designated series contact and the logical operation results before contact in order to perform “AND”...
Page 907 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function Series circuit block Operand ANB performs an “AND” operation on the previously saved logic results and the current cumulative register content. Ladder diagram: Command code: Description: Load Contact A of X0 Establish a parallel connection to contact B of X2 Load Contact B of X1...
Page 908 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function Read stack Operand Retrieves the result of the previously-saved logical operation from the stack, and saves to the cumulative register (subtract one from stack pointer). Ladder diagram: Command code: Description: Load Contact A of X0 Save to the stack Create a series connection to contact A...
Page 909 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function Clear contact or register X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand      － Resets the designated element as described. Element Mode Y, M Both coil and contact are set to OFF. Sets the current timing or count value to 0 and both the coil and contact T, C are set to OFF.
Page 910 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function MC / MCR Connect / release a common series contact Operand N0–N7 MC is the main control initiation command, and any command between MC and MCR is executed normally. When the MC command is OFF, any command between MC and MCR acts as follows: Determination of commands Description...
Page 911 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function Start of rising edge detection action X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand      － The LDP command has the same use as LD, but its action is different. Its function is to save the current content while also saving the detected state of the rising edge of the contact to the cumulative register.
Page 912 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function ANDF Falling edge detection series connection X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand      － Use the ANDF command for a contact falling edge detection series connection. Ladder diagram: Command code: Description: Load Contact A of X0...
Page 913 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function Upper differential output X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399 Operand   －－－－ Upper differential output command: when X0 switches from OFF to ON (rising edge- triggered), the PLS command is executed, and M0 sends one pulse with the pulse length consisting of one scanning period.
Page 914 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command Function No action Operand The NOP command does not perform any operation in the program. Because execution of this command retains the original logical operation results, you can use it in the following situation: use the NOP command instead of a command that is deleted without changing the program length.
Page 915 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-6-3 Overview of application commands Command code STEPS Classification Function 16 bit 32 bit command 16 bit 32 bit CALL Call a subprogram  Circuit control SRET End a subprogram FEND End a main program DCMP Compare set output ...
Page 916 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command code STEPS Classification Function 16 bit 32 bit command 16 bit 32 bit Communication MODRW – Modbus read / write –  DGRY Convert BIN to GRAY code  GRAY code GBIN DGBIN Convert GRAY code to BIN ...
Page 917 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Command code STEPS Classification Function 16 bit 32 bit command 16 bit 32 bit Floating point number contact FAND＜＞ form compare AND* Floating point number contact FAND＝＞ form compare AND* Floating point number contact FAND＝＜ form compare AND* Floating point number contact FOR＝...
Page 918 32-bit command The S operand can designate P. －－－－ MH300 series device: The S operand can designate P0-P63. Flag signal: none S: Call subprogram pointer  Write the subprogram after the FEND command.  The subprogram must end after the SRET command.
Page 919 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 FEND End of a main program － bit device Word device 16-bit command (1 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM FEND －－ execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: No operand －－－－...
Page 920 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Compare set output bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM CMPP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 921 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Range comparison bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM ZCPP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 922 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Move data bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM MOVP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: none Continuous Pulse...
Page 923 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 BMOV Send all bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) KnX KnY KnM Continuous Pulse BMOV BMOVP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command ＊...
Page 924 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 BIN addition bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM ADDP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 925 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 BIN subtraction bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM SUBP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 926 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 BIN multiplication bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM MULP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 927 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 BIN division bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM DIVP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 928 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 BIN add one bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM INCP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊ Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous Pulse DINC...
Page 929 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 BIN subtract one bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM DECP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊ Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous Pulse DDEC...
Page 930 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Right rotation bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM RORP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: Continuous Pulse DROR...
Page 931 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Left rotation bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM ROLP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) Notes on operand usage: Continuous Pulse DROL...
Page 932 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ZRST Clear range bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) KnX KnY KnM Continuous Pulse ZRST ZRSTP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: Number of operand D operand ≤...
Page 933 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Convert BIN whole number to binary decimal bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9steps) ＊＊＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DFLT DFLTP...
Page 934 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ECMP Compare binary floating point numbers bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse ＊＊＊ DECMP DECMPP execution type execution type...
Page 935 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 EZCP Compare binary floating point number range bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (17 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse DEZCP DEZCPP ＊...
Page 936 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Convert angle to diameter bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DRAD DRADP execution type execution type Refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage.
Page 937 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Convert diameter to angle bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DDEG DDEGP execution type execution type Refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope of device usage.
Page 938 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 EADD Add binary floating point numbers bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse ＊ DEADD DEADDP execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Refer to the function specifications table for each device in series...
Page 939 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ESUB Subtract binary floating point numbers bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse ＊ DESUB DESUBP execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Refer to the function specifications table for each device in series...
Page 940 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 EMUL Multiply binary floating point numbers bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse ＊ DEMUL DEMULP execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Refer to the function specifications table for each device in series...
Page 941 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 EDIV Divide binary floating point numbers bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse ＊ DEDIV DEDIVP execution type execution type Notes on operand usage: Refer to the function specifications table for each device in series...
Page 942 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the exponent of a binary floating point number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DEXP DEXPP execution type...
Page 943 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the natural logarithm of a binary floating point bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DLNP execution type execution type...
Page 944 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the square root of a binary floating point ESQR number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous DESQR Pulse Notes on operand usage: DESQR execution type...
Page 945 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Convert binary floating point number to BIN whole number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DINT DINTP execution type execution type...
Page 946 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the sine of a binary floating point number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DSIN DSINP execution type...
Page 947 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the cosine of a binary floating point number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DCOS DCOSP execution type...
Page 948 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the tangent of a binary floating point number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DTAN DTANP execution type...
Page 949 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ASIN Find the arcsine of a binary floating point number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DASIN DASINP execution type...
Page 950 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ACOS Find the arccosine of a binary floating point number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous DACOS Pulse Notes on operand usage: DACOS execution type execution type...
Page 951 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 ATAN Find the arctangent of a binary floating point number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DATAN DATANP execution type...
Page 952 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the hyperbolic sine of at binary floating point SINH number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DSINH DSINHP execution type...
Page 953 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the hyperbolic cosine of a binary floating point COSH number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DCOSH DCOSHP execution type...
Page 954 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Find the hyperbolic tangent of a binary floating point TANH number bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊ Continuous Pulse Notes on operand usage: DTANH DTANHP execution type...
Page 955 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 MODRW Modbus data read / write Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) MODRW Continuous Pulse MODRW KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command －－－－ Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079 S1: online device address.
Page 956 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 PLC controlling slave device MODRW command Serial Example Function Node ID Address Register Length code Reads 4 sets of data comprising the PLC slave device's X0 to X3 state, and H400 saves the read data in bits 0 to 3 of D0 Reads 4 sets of data comprising the PLC slave device's Y0 to Y3 state, and H500...
Page 957 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Will trigger M0 On when the PLC begins to operate, and sends instruction to  execute one MODRW command. After receiving the slave device's response, if the command is correct, it will  execute one ROL command, which will cause M1 to be On. After receiving the slave device's response, will trigger M50 = 1 after a delay of 10 ...
Page 958 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Convert BIN to GRAY code bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous GRYP Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 959 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 GBIN Convert GRAY code to BIN bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM GBIN GBINP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 960 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 SCAL Scale value operation bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) KnX KnY KnM Continuous Pulse ＊＊＊ SCAL SCALP execution type execution type ＊＊＊ 32-bit command ＊＊＊＊ Notes on operand usage: Flag signal: none Refer to the function specifications table for each device in series...
Page 961 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Suppose the values in S1, S2, and S3 are 500, 168, and -4 respectively. When  X0 is ON, the instruction SCAL is executed, and the scale value is stored in D0. 16-98...
Page 962 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Contact form logical operation LD# 215– bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM －－ execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 963 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 AND# Contact form logical operation AND# 218– bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM －－ AND# execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 964 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Contact form logical operation OR# 221– bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM －－ execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 965 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 LD※ Contact form compare LD* 224– bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM －－ LD※ execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 966 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 AND※ Contact form compare AND* 232– bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM －－ AND※ execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 967 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 OR※ Contact form compare OR* 240– bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) Continuous KnX KnY KnM －－ OR※ execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊...
Page 968 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 FLD※ Floating point number contact form compare LD* 275– bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous －－ FLD※...
Page 969 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 FAND※ Floating point number contact form compare AND* 281– bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous －－ FAND※...
Page 970 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 FOR※ Floating point number contact form compare OR* 287– bit device Word device 16-bit command KnX KnY KnM －－－－＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP) ＊＊＊ Continuous －－ FOR※...
Page 971 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-6-5 Detailed explanation of drive special application commands Read servo parameter bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) KnX KnY KnM Continuous Pulse RPRP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: none －...
Page 972 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Recommendation Be cautious when using the WPR command. When writing parameters, most parameters are recorded when they are written, and these parameters may only be revised 10 times: a memory write error may occur if parameters are written more than (MS)10 or (MH)10 times.
Page 973 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 FPID Drive PID control mode bit device Word device 16-bit command (9 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM FPID FPIDP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command ＊＊＊－...
Page 974 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 FREQ Drive speed control mode bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEP) Continuous Pulse KnX KnY KnM FREQ FREQP execution type execution type ＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command ＊＊＊－...
Page 975 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 bit 1: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, acts on whether the target torque has been cleared to 0. This is written to the TORQ command when the PLC is bit 2: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, acts on whether speed limits in the torque mode have been cleared to 0.
Page 976 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 TORQ Drive torque control mode Bit device Word device 16-bit command (5 STEP) TORQ Continuous TORQ P Pulse KnX KnY KnM execution type execution type 32-bit command Notes on operand usage: none －－－－...
Page 977 When unsupported commands are Check if the firmware of the drive is the old PLFn found during PLC downloading, version. If yes, please contact Delta. then PLFn warning shows. 1. Disable PLC function When internal program code errors 2. Clear PLC program (set Pr.00-02 = 6)
Page 978 Refer to Pr.05-00 for details. ※ If the PM motor is one of the Delta ECMA series, you can directly input the motor parameters according to the servo motor catalog. There is no need to perform motor parameter auto-tuning.
Page 979 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Speed mode control commands: FREQ(P) Target speed The first acceleration time setting The first deceleration time setting Example of speed mode control: Before using speed control, if you use the FOC (magnetic field orientation) control method, you must first complete the setting of the electro-mechanical parameters.
Page 980 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Torque control: Register table for torque mode: Control special M Special M Function Description Attributes M1040 Hardware power (Servo On) Status special M Special M Function Description Attributes M1056 Hardware already has power (Servo On ready) M1063 Torque reached Control special D...
Page 981 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-9 Count Function Using Pulse Input 16-9-1 High-speed count function The MH300’s MI7 supports one-way pulse counting, or you can use MI6+MI7 to support AB-phase two-way pulse counting, with a maximum speed of 33 k. The starting method is very simple, and only requires setting M1038 to begin counting.
Page 982 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-10 CANopen Master control applications Control of a simple multi-axis application is required in certain situations. If the device supports the CANopen protocol, a MH300 can serve as the master in implementing simple control (position, speed, homing, and torque control).
Page 983 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 After leaving the PLC register window, the register setting screen will appear, as  shown below: If there is a new PLC program and no settings have been made yet, you can read default data from the converter, and merely edit it to suit the current application.
Page 984 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 After reading the data, it is necessary to perform some special D settings. Before proceeding, we will first introduce the special D implications and setting range. The CANopen Master's special D range is currently D1070 to D1099 and D2000 to D2399; this range is divided into 3 blocks: The first block is used to display CANopen's current status, and has a range of D1070–D1089 The second block is used for CANopen's basic settings, and has a range of D1090–D1099...
Page 985 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Special D Description of Function Channel opened by CANopen initialization (bit0=Machine D1070 code0 …….) Error channel occurring in CANopen initialization process D1071 (bit0=Machine code0 …….) D1072 Reserved D1073 CANopen break channel (bit0=Machine code0 …….) Error code of master error 0: No error D1074 1: Slave station setting error...
Page 986 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 If slave devices have a slow start-up, the master can delay for a short time before performing slave station configuration; this time delay can be set via D1092. Special D Description of Function Default D1092 Delay before start of initialization With regard to slave device initialization, a delay time can be set to judge whether failure has occurred.
Page 987 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 CANopen provides a PDO method to perform mapping of the master and slave station memory, and enables the master to directly access read/write data in a certain memory area. The master will automatically perform data exchange with the corresponding slave device, and the read/write values can be seen directly from the special D area after real-time exchange (M1034 = 1 time) has been established.
Page 988 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 D2067+100*n =000Ah： TXPDO Length: PDO2 (Remote I/O) PDO1 (Speed) Description Special D Description Special D Slave device DI D2026+100*n Controller Word D2009+100*n Slave device AI1 Actual frequency D2028+100*n D2013+100*n Slave device AI2 D2029+100*n Slave device AI3 D2030+100*n PDO2 PDO1...
Page 989 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Basic definitions PDO Default Special D Description of Function Default Communications break handling method of slave D2006+100*n station number n D2007+100*n Error code of slave station number n error D2008+100*n Control word of slave station number n ●...
Page 990 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 After gaining an understanding of special D definitions, we return to setting steps. After entering the values corresponding to D1090 to D1099, D2000+100*n, D2034+100*n and D2067+100*n, we can begin to perform downloading, which is performed in accordance with the following steps: 1.
Page 991 Step 5: Set the slave stations' station numbers, communications speed, control source, and command source Delta's MH300 and MS300 series devices currently support the CANopen communications interface drive, and the corresponding slave station numbers and communications speed parameters are as follows:...
Page 992 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Step 6: Connect hardware wiring When performing wiring, note the head and tail terminal resistance; connection methods are as follows: *1. Turn the terminal resistor setting switch SW to *2. Turn the terminal resistor setting switch SW to *3.
Page 993 (0x01), read input (0x02), read register (0x03), write to single register (0x06), write to several coils (0x0F), and write to several registers (0x10). Explanations and the usage of these functions are provided as follows: MODRW command General Slave device is Delta's PLC Slave device is Delta's Node meaning meaning...
Page 994 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 When the reported message indicates no error, it will switch to the next transmitted command M1077 M1078 M1079 K4M0 ROLP 485 R/W 485 R/W 485 R/W rite is co rite is fail rite is time 0 If time out occurs or an error is reported, the M1077 will change to On.
Page 995 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 RTU-485: The station number = 8 (give example) ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 DR2 DR1 DR0 A/R Communication station #: ID0~ ID7 are defined as 2 , 2 , 2 ...2 , 2 Communication protocol Communication Protocol Communicaton Speed...
Page 996 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Step 3: Physical configuration C2000 Plus NOTE: Digital frequency signal common (Sink) can switch to SGND. Step 4: Write to PLC program 16-133...
Page 997 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-134...
Page 998 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 Step 5: Actual testing situation: I/O testing: When the switch is activated, it can be discovered that the display corresponds to M115–M108. Furthermore, it can be seen that one output point light is added every 1 sec. (the display uses a binary format) This light signal increase by 1number per second.
Page 999 Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMH300 16-136...
Page 1000 Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off FunctionMH300 Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function 17-1 Basic Function Description 17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description 17-3 Wiring Diagram 17-4 Failure Rate of the Drive Safety Function 17-5 Reset the Parameter Settings 17-6 Timing Diagram Description 17-7 Fault Codes and Troubleshooting Instructions 17-8 Test and Fault Confirmation 17-1...

This manual is also suitable for:

Vfd1a6mh11ansaa Vfd1a6mh11ensaa Vfd1a6mh21ansaa Vfd1a6mh21ensaa Vfd2a5mh11ansaa Vfd2a5mh11ensaa ... Show all

Delta MH300 Series User Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Delta MH300 Series

Summary of Contents for Delta MH300 Series

This manual is also suitable for: